1. 第一品显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamavaggo
贪经注释显示巴利原文
1. Lobhasuttavaṇṇanā
1 现在,正是对世尊以“诸比丘,应断一法”等开示的那部经进行注释的时候了。然而,若要解说此义注,须先审察经的安立方能明了,因此我们先来审察经的安立。经的安立确有四种:自意、他意、依问、因事。正如经典虽有数百数千种类,却不超出依杂染分等安立方式而有的十六种分类;同样地,它们也都不超出以自意等经安立为门类而成的四种分类。其中,自意和因事,与他意、依问之间可能存在关联与差异。例如自意与他意、自意与依问、因事与他意、因事与依问,这是因为有意乐与提问的关联存在。同样地,因事与自意虽亦可能有关联与差异,但由于自意等先已存在,因事与它们并无关联,故并非无遗漏的安立方式。又或者,因为可能存在的其余安立方式皆包含于此中,故以根本安立为门,而说四种经的安立,当如是理解。显示巴利原文
1. Idāni ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahathātiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā atthavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāressāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti. Yathā hi anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhataṃ nātivattantīti. Tattha yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāvasikehi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko cāti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisambhavato; evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā attajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti niravaseso paṭṭhānanayo na sambhavati. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattāro suttanikkhepā vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
在此,这些词的释义如下:因被安立,故称“安立”;经本身就是安立,故称“经安立”。或者,安立的行为即是“安立”,经的安立即是“经安立”,意为经的教导。自己的意乐名为“自意”,以此为因而有,故称“自意”;或说自己的意乐是其因,故称“自意”。对于“他意”,亦同此理。依于提问而说,故称“依问”;提问为其因,故称“依问”。能成为经教基础的事的生起,是为“事起”;“事起”即“因事”,变 tha 音为 ṭha 音;以此为因而有,故称“因事”。又或者,经由这些而安立经,故称“安立”,即自意等本身。而在词义分别中:自己的意乐是“自意”;他人的意乐是“他意”。所提问的为“问”,即应被提问之义;依提问而生起的、说法者之语是“依问语”;依“安立”一词,由男性性别而说为“依问”。同样,“事起”即是“因事”,应如此理解此处的含义。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo, attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vasoti pucchāvaso. So etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti , atthuppatti eva aṭṭhuppatti tha-kārassa ṭha-kāraṃ katvā, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti nikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho, pucchāvasena pavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pucchāvasikoti pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evamettha attho veditabbo.
再者,由于不依赖他人根器成熟等因缘,自意单独作为经安立是合理的,因为此种教导唯依自己的意乐而开展,旨在令法住立。然而,他意与依问是以他人的意乐和提问作为说法的生起因,当这些生起时,怎么在因事中不被包含?或者,依问与因事是随他意而生起,怎么在他意中不被包含?不应如此质疑。因为除了他人的志向、遍问等之外,唯有以经的教说之因的生起为特征的,方被视为因事,故另立“他意”与“依问”。如《梵网经》、《法嗣经》等,以称赞、贬毁、利养等事的生起为说法之缘,这称为因事。不因他人提问,唯以意乐为缘而说者,为他意;依提问之力而说者,为依问。此理昭然。显示巴利原文
Apica paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto, kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (dī. na. 1.1 ādayo) vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ aṭṭhuppatti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
凡是世尊不待他人劝请,唯依自心意乐而说的法,如《希求经》《迅速经》等,这类法的安立即是‘依自意’。显示巴利原文
Yāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti, seyyathidaṃ – ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, tuvaṭṭakasuttantievamādīni (su. ni. 921 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.64 ādayo), tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
而那些观察他人的意乐、堪忍、志向与觉悟状态之后,依他人心意而说的法,例如:观察到‘罗睺罗的解脱成熟法已圆满,我今更应教导罗睺罗断尽诸漏’,便说出《教诫罗睺罗经》;又如《转法轮经》等。这类法的安立即是‘依他意’。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca oloketvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – rāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanasuttantievamādīni (ma. ni. 2.107 ādayo; 3.416 ādayo; saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 19-20), tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
然而,诸天、人、四众、四种姓来到世尊面前,以种种方式提问,例如:‘尊者,常说觉支、觉支,又说盖、盖……’世尊应这些提问而说的法,如《觉支相应》等,这类法的安立即是‘依问’。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā devā manussā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā ca tathā tathā pañhaṃ pucchanti ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgāti, bhante, vuccanti, nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇāti vuccantī’’tiādinā , evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni (saṃ. ni. 5.186) tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
然而,那些依已生起的因缘而说的,例如《法嗣经》《子肉喻经》《木段喻经》等,它们的安立则是依于因事。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ, puttamaṃsūpamaṃ, dārukkhandhūpamantievamādīni (ma. ni. 1.29; saṃ. ni. 2.63), tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
如此,在这四种经的安立中,此经的安立属于“他意”。因为它正是依他意而安立的——依谁的意乐呢?依那些已见到贪欲过患之人之意乐。然而,也有人说它是“自意”。显示巴利原文
Evamimesu catūsu suttanikkhepesu imassa suttassa parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Parajjhāsayavasena hetaṃ nikkhittaṃ. Kesaṃ ajjhāsayena? Lobhe ādīnavadassīnaṃ puggalānaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘attajjhāsayo’’ti vadanti.
其中,在“比丘们,一法”等句中,“一”这个词,于某处作“某些”义,如:“有些(人)宣称:‘我与世间是常,唯此是真实,其余皆虚妄。’”(中部3.27);于某处作“殊胜”义,如“心之专一状态”(长部1.228;波罗夷11);于某处作“无伴侣”义,如“独自远离而住”(长部1.405);于某处作“计数”义,如“比丘们,确确实实只有一个刹那、一个时机用于梵行”(增支部8.29)。在此处,也应视为“计数”义。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhavetiādīsu ekasaddo attheva aññatthe ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27). Atthi seṭṭhe ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228; pārā. 11). Atthi asahāye ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405). Atthi saṅkhāyaṃ ‘‘ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29). Idhāpi saṅkhāyameva daṭṭhabbo.
“法”这个词,出现在教理、谛、定、慧、本性、福、罪、空、所知、自性等含义中。例如,在“此处比丘学习法”(增支部5.73)等句中,意思是教理。在“现见的法”(长部1.299)等句中,意思是谛。在“那些世尊具有如是法”(长部2.13;3.142)等句中,意思是定。在“真实、法、坚忍、布施,死后不忧愁”(本生经1.1.57)等句中,意思是慧。在“比丘们,有生法的众生,生起这样的欲望”(长部2.398)等句中,意思是本性。在“法确实保护行法者”(本生经1.10.102)等句中,意思是福。在“应以三法中的某一法来论说,或以波罗夷,或以桑喀地谢沙,或以波逸提”(波罗夷444)等句中,意思是罪。在“在那个时刻,诸法存在”(法集论121)等句中,意思是空性。在“一切法以一切方式,出现在佛陀世尊的智门之前”(大义释156;小义释·莫伽罗阇童子问义释85)等句中,意思是所知。在“善法、不善法”(法集论·三法论母1)等句中,意思是自性。在此处,同样是指自性。因此,“一法”是指一种杂染的自性,这是它的意趣所在。而显示巴利原文
Dhamma-saddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattisuññatāñeyyasabhāvādīsu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyatti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299) saccāni. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; 3.142) samādhi. ‘‘Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, save pecca na socatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) paññā. ‘‘Jātidhammānaṃ, bhikkhave, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.398) pakati. ‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102) puññaṃ. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena vadeyya pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 444) āpatti. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) suññatā. ‘‘Sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) ñeyyo. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sabhāvo attho . Idhāpi sabhāvo. Tasmā ekadhammanti ekaṃ saṃkilesasabhāvanti adhippāyo. Eko ca so dhammo cāti ekadhammo, taṃ ekadhammaṃ.
“比丘们”是对比丘们的称呼。然而,世尊说法时,为何要称呼比丘们,而不仅仅是说法呢?是为了令他们生起正念。因为比丘们坐着时,有的在想其他事情,有的在省察法,有的在作意业处。如果不先称呼他们而说法,他们便无法正确了知:“这个说法以什么为因?以什么为缘?”但是,当被称呼后,他们便能提起正念,正确了知。因此,为了令他们生起正念,世尊称呼“比丘们”。而且,通过这个由乞食习性等功德成就的称呼,世尊显示了远离卑劣与骄慢之人的生活方式,从而调伏了掉举与昏沉的心。通过“比丘们”这个以慈悲遍满、柔和之心与眼神为先导的称呼,世尊使他们面向自己,并且通过这个表明欲说之意的称呼,令他们生起听闻的欲望。正是通过这个称呼的意义,世尊也促使他们善巧地听闻与作意。因为教法的成就,依赖于善巧地听闻与作意。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhaveti bhikkhū ālapati. Kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento bhikkhū ālapati, na dhammameva desetīti? Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū hi aññaṃ cintentāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karontāpi nisinnā honti. Te paṭhamaṃ anālapitvā dhamme desiyamāne ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kiṃnidānā, kiṃpaccayā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ na sakkonti. Ālapite pana satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā sallakkhetuṃ sakkonti, tasmā satijananatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti ālapati. Tena ca tesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhikkhave’’ti iminā karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano mukhābhimukhe karonto tena ca kathetukamyatādīpakena vacanena nesaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti. Teneva ca sambodhanatthena sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārepi niyojeti. Sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
当也有天、人等众会成员在场时,为什么只称呼比丘们呢?因为比丘们最为年长、最为殊胜、最为亲近、常随侍。世尊的说法遍及一切众会,而在众会中,比丘们最为年长,因为他们是最先被度化的;最为殊胜,因为他们以出家为始,随导师修行,并且领受全部教法;最为亲近,因为在就坐的众人中,他们住于附近;常随侍,因为他们常住在导师身边。再者,他们是说法的容器,因为他们具有依教修行的素质,而且,这开示是特别针对某些比丘的,因此只称呼他们。显示巴利原文
Aññesupi devamanussesu parisapariyāpannesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhū eva āmantesīti? Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā, parisāya ca jeṭṭhā bhikkhū paṭhamuppannattā, seṭṭhā anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthu cariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca, āsannā tattha nisinnesu samīpavuttiyā, sadāsannihitā satthusantikāvacarattā. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato, visesato ca ekacce bhikkhū sandhāya ayaṃ desanāti te eva ālapi.
“应断”:此处之断有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断。其中,犹如以灯光除暗,因灯光为暗的对治,故以无贪等断贪等,以名色分别等观智断种种不实,此即彼分断。具体而言:以布施断除贪等垢染,以戒断除杀生等恶戒,以信等断除无信等,以名色确定断除身见,以缘摄受断除无因见与不等因见;此后,以度疑清净断除犹豫不定,以诸行群聚思惟断除‘我、我所’执取,以道非道智见清净断除于非道执为道想,以生随观断除断灭见,以灭随观断除常见,以怖畏随观断除于可怖所缘生起的无怖想,以过患随观断除乐味想,以厌离随观断除喜乐想,以欲解脱智断除不欲解脱的状态,以行舍智断除不中舍的状态,以随顺智断除对法住性的执著,以种姓智断除对诸行相的执取——这些称为彼分断。显示巴利原文
Pajahathāti ettha pahānaṃ nāma tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha yaṃ dīpālokeneva tamassa paṭipakkhabhāvato alobhādīhi lobhādikassa, nāmarūpaparicchedādivipassanāñāṇehi tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – pariccāgena lobhādimalassa, sīlena pāṇātipātādidussīlyassa, saddhādīhi assaddhiyādikassa, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhayesu abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanena abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyā, nibbānena paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma.
依近行定与安止定等差别之定,能遮止烦恼的现行与修习,犹如以陶锤击打水面之苔,令他们盖障诸法断除,此名镇伏断。由修习四种圣道,随各自道力,于自相续中,如‘为断诸见’等说,将属于集谛的烦恼众类彻底斩断,令其永不复生,此名正断。于果位刹那,烦恼达至止息状态,此名止息断。由于出离一切有为法,一切有为悉皆断尽,此即涅槃,名为出离断。此五种断中,此处意指能成就不来果之断,故应知为正断。因此,‘应断’之义为:应舍弃,应彻底根除。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena samucchindanaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Evaṃ pañcavidhe pahāne anāgāmikabhāvakarassa pahānassa adhippetattā idha samucchedappahānanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā pajahathāti pariccajatha, samucchindathāti attho.
‘我’为世尊自指。‘vo’字,在巴利语中见于主格、业格、具格、属格、填充词与为格。如:‘阿那律尊者,汝等是否和合欢喜?’(《中部》1.326)中,作主格。‘诸比丘,去矣,吾遣散汝等。’(《中部》2.157)中,作业格。‘汝等不应住于我前。’(同前)中,作具格。‘舍利弗,汝等所说皆为善说。’(《中部》1.345)中,作属格。‘诸贤,他们圣者之清净身业。’(《中部》1.35)中,为填充词。‘诸比丘,吾当为汝等宣说林野分际法门。’(《中部》1.190)中,作为格。此处亦应视为为格。显示巴利原文
Ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Voti ayaṃ vosaddo paccattaupayogakaraṇasāmivacanapadapūraṇasampadānesu dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘kacci, pana vo anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326) paccatte āgato. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. Idhāpi sampadāne eva daṭṭhabbo.
“保证者”即担保人。因为他对于债权人是债务人的代表,对于债务人又是债权人的代表;他以提取等方式享用债权人的财物,成为“享用者”,故称保证者,巴利语即pāṭibhogo。“为不来者性”:指为了证得不来者的状态。因不再以结生的方式返回欲有,故名不来者。通过证得某一法而被称作不来者的有果第三道,便是不来者性。如是,世尊善能调御可教化者,随其心意,以简要之法,圆满一法便稳固地展示了第三道的证得,正是正自觉者所行。因为第三道所应断的嗔恚等结缚烦恼,纵使层次有别,也无一能超越对欲贪的断除。显示巴利原文
Pāṭibhogoti paṭibhū. So hi dhāraṇakaṃ paṭicca dhanikassa, dhanikaṃ paṭicca dhāraṇakassa paṭinidhibhūto dhanikasantakassa tato haraṇādisaṅkhātena bhuñjanena bhogoti paṭibhogo, paṭibhogo eva pāṭibhogo. Anāgāmitāyāti anāgāmibhāvatthāya. Paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena hi kāmabhavassa anāgamanato anāgāmī. Yo yassa dhammassa adhigamena anāgāmīti vuccati, saphalo so tatiyamaggo anāgāmitā nāma. Iti bhagavā veneyyadamanakusalo veneyyajjhāsayānukūlaṃ tatiyamaggādhigamaṃ lahunā upāyena ekadhammapūraṇatāmattena thiraṃ katvā dassesi yathā taṃ sammāsambuddho. Bhinnabhūmikāpi hi paṭighasaṃyojanādayo tatiyamaggavajjhā kilesā kāmarāgappahānaṃ nātivattantīti.
然而,世尊在此处为何将自己立为保证者呢?为激发那些比丘证得不来道的精进心。世尊看见,当他说出“比丘们,应断一法,我作你们不来者性的保证者”之后,这些比丘必定会想:“法主既已先说‘我作保证者’,那么断除那一法后,一定能够证得第三地。所以,应当为此目的而努力修行。”如此一来,他们便会生起精进心。因此,为激发比丘们的精进,世尊便将自身立为比丘们不来者性的保证者。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha bhagavā attānaṃ pāṭibhogabhāve ṭhapesi? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāgāmimaggādhigamāya ussāhajananatthaṃ. Passati hi bhagavā ‘‘mayā ‘ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’ti vutte ime bhikkhū addhā taṃ ekadhammaṃ pahāya sakkā tatiyabhūmiṃ samadhigantuṃ, yato dhammassāmi paṭhamamāha ‘ahaṃ pāṭibhogo’ti ussāhajātā tadatthāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti. Tasmā ussāhajananatthaṃ anāgāmitāya tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ attānaṃ pāṭibhogabhāve ṭhapesi.
“哪一法呢”——在此是提问语。提问共有五种:未见解明问、已见合勘问、断疑问、认可问、欲说法问。其中,当某一特征未知、未见、未衡量、未审察、未显明、未阐明,为了了知、见、衡量、审察、显明、阐明它而提问,这是未见解明问。当特征已经了知、已见、已衡量、已审察、已显明、已阐明,为了与其他智者核对探讨而提问,这是已见合勘问。当对特征陷入疑惑、犹豫,生起“是这样吗?不是这样吗?是什么?怎么回事?”等两难时,为断除疑惑而提问,这是断疑问。世尊为获得认可而提问,如“比丘们,你们认为如何?色是常还是无常?”(《相应部》3.59;《大品》21)等,这是认可问。世尊出于说法的意欲而提问,如“比丘们,有四种食,能令已生的众生安住,或令求生的众生得到资助。哪四种呢?”(《相应部》2.11)这是欲说法问。显示巴利原文
Katamaṃ ekadhammanti ettha katamanti pucchāvacanaṃ. Pucchā ca nāmesā pañcavidhā – adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā , kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tattha pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtatthāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā. Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. So aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā. Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto – ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā. Bhagavā hi anumatiggahaṇatthaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 21), ayaṃ anumatipucchā. Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā.
在这五种提问中,前三种是佛陀所没有的。为什么呢?因为在三时中,一切有为法或超越三时的无为法,对正自觉者而言,没有哪一法是他未曾见、未曾衡量、未曾审察、未曾显明、未曾明了的。因此,他们没有“未见解明”的提问。而且,他们以自己智慧通达的法,没有必要与任何其他沙门、婆罗门、天、魔或梵天进行核对探讨,因此他们也没有“已见合勘”的提问。又因为诸佛世尊已无疑惑,超脱了疑惑,于一切法无有犹豫,所以他们也没有“断疑”的提问。但是,后两种提问是存在的,而此处的这一种提问,应当知道属于“欲说法提问”。显示巴利原文
Tattha purimā tisso pucchā buddhānaṃ natthi. Kasmā? Tīsu hi addhāsu kiñci saṅkhataṃ addhāvimuttaṃ vā asaṅkhataṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ nāma natthi. Tena nesaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā natthi. Yaṃ pana tehi attano ñāṇena paṭividdhaṃ, tassa aññena samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā saddhiṃ saṃsandanakiccaṃ natthi, tena nesaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchāpi natthi. Yasmā pana buddhā bhagavanto akathaṃkathī tiṇṇavicikicchā sabbadhammesu vigatasaṃsayā, tena nesaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchāpi natthi. Itarā pana dve pucchā atthi, tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti veditabbā.
现在,为了具体阐明那个提问所问的意义,世尊开示说:“比丘们,贪,是一法。”在此,由于众生依之而染著,或它本身即是染著,或仅是染著的本身,故名为“贪”。此贪,以执取所缘为相,如同猕猴被胶所黏;以黏著为用,如同肉片落在热锅;以不舍弃为现起,犹如灯油的油垢;以在可结缚的事物中见乐味为近因。它不断增长,汇聚成渴爱之流;应知从它生起之处,便如急流将众生漂入大海(恶趣)一样。虽然“贪”是通称所有贪,但此处应知它特指欲贪,因为欲贪正是由不来道所断除的。显示巴利原文
Idāni tāya pucchāya puṭṭhamatthaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti lobho. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇo makkaṭālepo viya, abhisaṅgaraso tattakapāle pakkhittamaṃsapesi viya, apariccāgapaccupaṭṭhāno telañjanarāgo viya, saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanapadaṭṭhāno, taṇhānadibhāvena vaḍḍhamāno yattha samuppanno, sīghasotā nadī viya mahāsamuddaṃ apāyameva taṃ sattaṃ gahetvā gacchatīti daṭṭhabbo. Kiñcāpi ayaṃ lobhasaddo sabbalobhasāmaññavacano, idha pana kāmarāgavacanoti veditabbo. So hi anāgāmimaggavajjho.
再有,“比丘们”这一呼唤,是为了激发那些作为法的接受者而面对法的人对此产生恭敬心。“应断除”这一句,建立了断现观,而断现观正是与遍知、证悟、修习的现观一起进行的,不是单独运作的;这样一来,基于四谛的四种正见功能都已经被包括了。而且,正如通过说“应断除贪”,由于贪是应断除的,所以对嗔等其他烦恼的断除,在意义上也一并被提到了;同样地,当说到在集谛领域里正见的功能(即断现观)时,作为它的俱行因的正思惟等其他道支,它们对集谛的功能在意义上也一并被提到了。因此,应该看到这里完整地描述了圣道的作用。按照这个道理,菩提分法如念处等的作用在这里被说出的方式,也应该根据情况进行详细解释。显示巴利原文
Puna bhikkhaveti ālapanaṃ dhammassa paṭiggāhakabhāvena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ tattha ādarajananatthaṃ. Pajahathāti iminā pahānābhisamayo vihito, so ca pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayehi saddhiṃ eva pavattati, na visunti catusaccādhiṭṭhānāni cattāripi sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccāni vihitāneva honti. Yathā ca ‘‘lobhaṃ pajahathā’’ti vutte pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato dosādīnampi pahānaṃ atthato vuttameva hoti, evaṃ samudayasaccavisaye sammādiṭṭhikicce pahānābhisamaye vutte tassā sahakārīkāraṇabhūtānaṃ sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ sesamaggaṅgānampi samudayasaccavisayakiccaṃ atthato vuttameva hotīti paripuṇṇo ariyamaggabyāpāro idha kathitoti daṭṭhabbo. Iminā nayena satipaṭṭhānādīnampi bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ byāpārassa idha vuttabhāvo yathārahaṃ vitthāretabbo.
此外,此处“应断除贪”一句说的是「断遍知」(pahānapariññā)。而断遍知依于「审察遍知」(tīraṇapariññā),审察遍知又依于「知遍知」(ñātapariññā);三者密不可分,因此这三种遍知全被揭示了出来。由此可知,此处连同果,完整开示了四谛业处。另一种理解是:“应断除贪”一句连同果,教导了「如实知见清净」(ñāṇadassanavisuddhi)。如实知见清净又依赖于「行道知见清净」(paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi)……依赖于「心清净」(cittavisuddhi)、「戒清净」(sīlavisuddhi)。当知,依此无间的连带关系,连同果,七种清净便全部被阐明了。显示巴利原文
Apicettha lobhaṃ pajahathāti etena pahānapariññā vuttā. Sā ca tīraṇapariññādhiṭṭhānā, tīraṇapariññā ca ñātapariññādhiṭṭhānāti avinābhāvena tissopi pariññā bodhitā honti. Evamettha saha phalena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā pakāsitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā lobhaṃ pajahathāti saha phalena ñāṇadassanavisuddhi desitā. Sā ca paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisannissayā…pe… cittavisuddhisīlavisuddhisannissayā cāti nānantarikabhāvena saha phalena sabbāpi satta visuddhiyo vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
如此,一位依清净次第修习、成就三种遍知而欲断贪的人——显示巴利原文
Evametāya visuddhikkamabhāvanāya pariññāttayasampādanena lobhaṃ pajahitukāmena –
“贪能生无义(anattha),贪能恼乱心(cittappakopano);
那从内在生起的恐惧,世人却不觉知。
贪著的人不知义,贪著的人不见法;
当贪欲征服人时,他便堕入极深的黑暗。”(《小部·如是语》第88经)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anatthajanano lobho, lobho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhati. ‘‘Luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ’’. (itivu. 88);
贤友,被贪欲染着、被贪欲征服、心被彻底缠缚的人,会杀害生命,会拿取未给予之物,会破门穿墙,掠夺财物,入户抢劫,拦路劫夺,会与他人妻子私通,也会说妄语。而那些对此不知、不见、不觉悟,只是随逐渴爱而惶恐不安的沙门、婆罗门,他们这样子,也只不过是在那里空自挣扎罢了。显示巴利原文
Ratto kho, āvuso, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto pāṇampi hanati, adinnampi ādiyati, sandhimpi chindati, nillopampi harati, ekāgārikampi karoti, paripanthepi tiṭṭhati, paradārampi gacchati, musāpi bhaṇati. Tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ avedayataṃ taṇhānugatānaṃ paritassitaṃ vipphanditameva (a. ni. 3.54).
以渴爱为同伴的人,在漫长的轮回中流转;他无法超越此处彼处种种存在形态的变迁,无法超越轮回。
依此诸经所教,应以种种方法观察贪欲的过患,进而精勤修行,以断除贪欲。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṇhādutiyo puriso, dīghamaddhāna saṃsaraṃ; Itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ, saṃsāraṃ nātivattati’’. (itivu. 15, 105); ‘‘Natthi rāgasamo aggi, natthi dosasamo kali’’. (dha. pa. 202, 251); ‘‘Kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi, cittaṃ me pariḍayhati’’. (saṃ. ni. 1.212); ‘‘Ye rāgarattānupatanti sotaṃ, sayaṃkataṃ makkaṭakova jāla’’nti. (dha. pa. 347) ca –
而且,有六种法能够帮助断除欲贪:学习不净相、致力于不净修习、在诸根上守护根门、在饮食上知道适量、亲近善知识、从事有益恰当的谈话。因为,学习十种不净相的人,能断除欲贪;依靠身至念的修习力量,在有识的膨胀相等不净相以及无识的不净相上,致力于不净修习的人,能断除欲贪;在意等六根中,以防护为因,用正念门扇关闭根门的人,能断除欲贪;当胃里还能容纳四、五口食物的空间时,便只饮水度日,这样在饮食上知道适量的人,也能断除欲贪。因此他说:显示巴利原文
Evamādisuttapadānusārena nānānayehi lobhassa ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā tassa pahānāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
吃下四、五口食物后,就只饮水维持,这足以让精进努力的比丘安稳安住。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā kāmarāgassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmarāgo pahīyati, kāyagatāsatibhāvanāvasena saviññāṇake uddhumātakādivasena aviññāṇake asubhe asubhabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassāpi, manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu saṃvaraṇavasena satikavāṭena pihitadvārassāpi , catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tenevāha –
只吃四五口食团后,便不再进食,只喝水;这足以让精进努力的比丘安稳安住。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
亲近乐于修习不净业处的善知识,并在站立、坐下等时谈论以十不净为所依的适当法义,也能断除爱欲。因此他说:显示巴利原文
Asubhakammaṭṭhānabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tenevāha –
诸比丘,有不净相,于此多修如理作意,即是令未生的欲贪不生起、令已生的欲贪断除的食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa pahānāyā’’ti.
如此,在修道的前行阶段,为断除称为欲贪的贪,修行者策励修习观,之后便以不来道将其无余地断除。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,应断除贪这一法。我为你们授记:决定证得不来果。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pubbabhāge kāmarāgasaṅkhātassa lobhassa pahānāya paṭipanno vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena taṃ anavasesato samucchindati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti.
于此,有人会问:“这里被断除的贪是什么?是过去的、未来的,还是现在的?”这是怎么回事呢?实情是:过去的贪无法被断除,未来的贪也无法被断除,因为它们都不存在。因为已经灭去的和尚未生起的,不能被称作“有”;如果那样,努力便成徒劳。如果是现在的贪,努力同样徒劳,因为现在的贪自性刹那即灭;并且,如此便会造成道修习的染污,或出现贪不与心相应的情况,然而这里并不适用那种道理。所以,并非以上述方式断除过去、未来或现在的贪。譬如,有一棵尚未结果的幼树,有人用斧头砍断树根。树被砍断之后,本应由它结出的果实,由于树已被砍断,未生起便永不再生。同样地,在圣道未证得时,本来会生起的贪,由于圣道证得而令其缘被切断,便不再生起。这即是注疏中所说的“得地而生”。在修观时所缘取的五取蕴是彼贪的生起处,故称为“地”。彼贪已经获得此地,因此称为“得地而生”。也正因此,它也被称为“所缘已执取而生”“未镇伏而生”“未断尽而生”。显示巴利原文
Etthāha ‘‘ko panettha lobho pahīyati, kiṃ atīto, atha anāgato, udāhu paccuppanno’’ti? Kiñcettha – na tāva atīto lobho pahīyeyya, na anāgato vā tesaṃ abhāvato. Na hi niruddhaṃ anuppannaṃ vā atthīti vuccati, vāyāmo ca aphalo āpajjati. Atha paccuppanno, evampi aphalo vāyāmo tassa sarasabhaṅgattā, saṃkiliṭṭhā ca maggabhāvanā āpajjati, cittavippayutto vā lobho siyā, na cāyaṃ nayo icchitoti. Vuccate – na vuttanayena atītānāgatapaccuppanno lobho pahīyati. Seyyathāpi idha taruṇarukkho asañjātaphalo, taṃ puriso kuṭhāriyā mūle chindeyya, tassa rukkhassa chede asati yāni phalāni nibbatteyyuṃ, tāni rukkhassa chinnattā ajātāni eva na jāyeyyuṃ, evameva ariyamaggādhigame asati uppajjanāraho lobho ariyamaggādhigamena paccayaghātassa katattā na uppajjati. Ayañhi aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘bhūmiladdhuppanno’’ti vuccati. Vipassanāya hi ārammaṇabhūtā pañcakkhandhā tassa uppajjanaṭṭhānatāya bhūmi nāma. Sā bhūmi tena laddhāti katvā bhūmiladdhuppanno. Ārammaṇādhiggahituppanno avikkhambhituppanno asamūhatuppannoti ca ayameva vuccati.
“于此”是指在该经中。“此”是指这已阐明的义理。现在是以偈颂结集的方式宣说。“此说”是由谁说的呢?正是由世尊所说。因为在其他类似的地方,会有结集者所作的结集偈颂,但在此处,世尊为了那些喜爱偈颂的人,随顺他们的意乐,将已说过的义理结集,宣说了偈颂。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ sutte. Etanti etaṃ atthajātaṃ. Idāni gāthābandhavasena vuccamānaṃ. Iti vuccatīti kena pana vuccati? Bhagavatā va. Aññesu hi tādisesu ṭhānesu saṅgītikārehi upanibandhagāthā honti, idha pana bhagavatā va gāthārucikānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttamevatthaṃ saṅgahetvā gāthā bhāsitā.
「因何贪而贪婪,有情去恶趣」:其中的「因何贪」——以执取所缘为相、以染著为用——由于此贪,有情对内外处贪染、执著。「贪婪」的‘se’只是一个语尾词,文法家认为在这样的地方应当添加‘se’。正因如此贪婪,故不造身善行等任何善业,反而积累身恶行等;那些因黏著于色等而被称为「有情」的众生,便以结生的方式往生、投生于地狱、畜生界、饿鬼界等名为「恶趣」之处,因为这些地方正是苦的生起之处。显示巴利原文
Tattha yena lobhena luddhāse, sattā gacchanti duggatinti yena ārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇena tato eva abhisaṅgarasena lobhena luddhā ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu giddhā gadhitā. Seti hi nipātamattaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu se-kārāgamaṃ icchanti. Tathā luddhattā eva kāyasucaritādīsu kiñci sucaritaṃ akatvā kāyaduccaritādīni ca upacinitvā rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya sattāti laddhanāmā pāṇino dukkhassa nibbattiṭṭhānatāya duggatīti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ nirayaṃ tiracchānayoniṃ pettivisayañca paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena gacchanti upapajjanti.
「彼贪,正知已,观者断除之」:即如前所述,对于那贪,从自性、集、灭、味、过患、出离这些行相,以正确无颠倒之因与智,依名为「知、度、遍知」的慧了知之后,对于色等五取蕴以无常等种种行相观照,故而称为「观者」;进而以观慧为先导,以道慧彻底断除彼贪,令其不再于自相续中生起。「断除后,再不于任何时候还来此世间」:如此,以共一处断之义,连同残余烦恼,由不来道断除彼贪之后,由于「下分结」已彻底断除,便不再以结生的方式还来这个名为欲界的世间。于是,世尊以「不来果」作为教说的结束。显示巴利原文
Taṃ lobhaṃ sammadaññāya, pajahanti vipassinoti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ lobhaṃ sabhāvato samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato nissaraṇatoti imehi ākārehi sammā aviparītaṃ hetunā ñāyena aññāya ñātatīraṇapariññāsaṅkhātāya paññāya jānitvā rūpādike pañcupādānakkhandhe aniccādīhi vividhehi ākārehi passanato vipassino avasiṭṭhakilese vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya samucchedappahānavasena pajahanti, na puna attano santāne uppajjituṃ denti. Pahāyana punāyanti, imaṃ lokaṃ kudācananti evaṃ sahajekaṭṭhapahānekaṭṭhehi avasiṭṭhakilesehi saddhiṃ taṃ lobhaṃ anāgāmimaggena pajahitvā puna pacchā imaṃ kāmadhātusaṅkhātaṃ lokaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena kadācipi na āgacchanti orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ suppahīnattā. Iti bhagavā anāgāmiphalena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
「此义亦」:指从因缘结束起,直至偈颂终了,由本经所阐明的义理。「亦」字是对接下来将宣说的诸经义理的归纳。其余皆如前说。在本经中,集圣谛以自性直接出现,道圣谛则以断除的指示而说明,其余二谛作为这两者的因,应当可以确定。而在偈颂中,苦、集、道圣谛随文可知,其余灭圣谛应当被确定。此后的诸经,亦依此法。显示巴利原文
Ayampi atthoti nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva gāthāpariyosānā iminā suttena pakāsito attho. Api-saddo idāni vakkhamānasuttatthasampiṇḍano. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Imasmiṃ sutte samudayasaccaṃ sarūpeneva āgataṃ, pahānāpadesena maggasaccaṃ. Itaraṃ saccadvayañca tadubhayahetutāya niddhāretabbaṃ. Gāthāya pana dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni yathārutavaseneva ñāyanti, itaraṃ niddhāretabbaṃ. Eseva nayo ito paresupi suttesu.
第二、嗔经注释显示巴利原文
2. Dosasuttavaṇṇanā
2 以上所说……“嗔”为第二部经。此处是对前文尚未出现的词语进行注释。如同此处所做的那样,此后在一切处,我们都将只对前未出现的词语作注。由于此经是世尊观察那些嗔恚深重之人的意乐后,为平息其嗔恚而宣说的,故经中云:“诸比丘,汝等当断一法,即嗔。”此处,“嗔”是指:以“他曾对我作无义之事”等方式(《分别论》960)于经中所说的那九种事,以及从与之相反的“他未曾对我作有义之事”等方式而成立的另外九种事,合为十八种愤恨生起之因,再加上如残桩、荆棘等不合道理的情形,总共十九种愤恨事中,以任何一种为因所生起的愤恨。为何名为“嗔”呢?因为愤恨借此而生气、发怒,或者它本身就是一种生气、发怒的状态,又或者它仅仅是生气、发怒本身,故称为“嗔”。其特相为粗暴,犹如被激怒的毒蛇;其作用是如毒液般扩散流溢,如同毒液滴落一般;或者说其作用是烧毁自己所依存之处,犹如森林大火;其现起之状为怒气冲冲,如同一位得到机会的怨敌;其近因则是前面所说的那些愤恨事。显示巴利原文
2.Vuttañhetaṃ…pe… dosanti dutiyasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Yathā ettha, evaṃ ito paresupi sabbattha apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃyeva karissāma. Yasmā idaṃ suttaṃ dosabahulānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā dosavūpasamanatthaṃ desitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dosaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahathā’’ti āgataṃ. Tattha dosanti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarīti āghāto jāyatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 960) nayena sutte vuttānaṃ navannaṃ, ‘‘atthaṃ me nācarī’’tiādīnañca tappaṭipakkhato siddhānaṃ navannamevāti aṭṭhārasannaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādinā aṭṭhānena saddhiṃ ekūnavīsatiyā aññatarāghātavatthusambhavaṃ āghātaṃ. So hi dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti dosoti vuccati. So caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo pahaṭāsīviso viya, visappanaraso visanipāto viya, attano nissayadahanaraso vā dāvaggi viya, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno laddhokāso viya sapatto, yathāvuttaāghātavatthupadaṭṭhāno visasaṃsaṭṭhapūtimuttaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo. Pajahathāti samucchindatha. Tattha ye ime –
“诸比丘,有此五种平息愤恨之法,比丘心中所生起的愤恨,应以此诸法彻底平息。何等为五?诸比丘,若于某人而生愤恨,则应于此人修习慈心……修习悲心……修习舍心……应于此人作不忆念、不作意之行,如是平息对其人之愤恨。诸比丘,若于某人而生愤恨,还应于此人确立‘业为自所有’之见:‘此具寿是业的所有者,是业的继承者……于未来亦复如是。’”显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, āghātapaṭivinayā, yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo. Katame pañca? Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, puggale āghāto jāyetha, mettā tasmiṃ puggale bhāvetabbā…pe… karuṇā…pe… upekkhā, asatiamanasikāro tasmiṃ puggale āpajjitabbo, evaṃ tasmiṃ puggale āghāto paṭivinetabbo. Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, puggale āghāto jāyetha, kammassakatā tasmiṃ puggale adhiṭṭhātabbā ‘kammassako ayamāyasmā kammadāyādo…pe… bhavissatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.161) –
以上即为经中所说的五种平息愤恨之法。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañca āghātappaṭivinayā vuttāyeva.
诸贤友,有五种平息愤恨之法,比丘所生起的愤恨,应依此彻底止息。哪五种呢?贤友,此处有一种人,身行不清净而语行清净;面对这样的人,贤友们,也应平息愤恨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcime, āvuso, āghātapaṭivinayā, yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo. Katame pañca? Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo aparisuddhakāyasamācāro hoti parisuddhavacīsamācāro; evarūpepi, āvuso, puggale āghāto paṭivinetabbo’’ti (a. ni. 5.162) –
以如这些理趣,宣说了五种平息愤恨的方法;运用其中任何一种平息愤恨的方法,作省察之后。再者,那一位——显示巴利原文
Evamādināpi nayena pañca āghātapaṭivinayā vuttā, tesu yena kenaci āghātapaṭivinayavidhinā paccavekkhitvā. Apica yo –
“比丘们,即使盗贼与暴徒用双柄锯将你们的肢节一节节锯断,其时若有人心生嗔恨,他便不是奉行我教法之人。”(《中部》1.232)此为导师的教诫。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṃ, tatrāpi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.232) satthu ovādo.
以愤怒回应愤怒者,比原先那个愤怒者更糟;
对愤怒者不报以愤怒,便能战胜那难胜的战斗。
他成就自他二利——自己的利益与他人的利益;
了知他人已生忿怒,具足正念的人便能平静下来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasseva tena pāpiyo, yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati; Kuddhaṃ appaṭikujjhanto, saṅgāmaṃ jeti dujjayaṃ. ‘‘Ubhinnamatthaṃ carati, attano ca parassa ca; Paraṃ saṅkupitaṃ ñatvā, yo sato upasammati. (saṃ. ni. 1.188);
比丘们,有七种法是怨敌所希求、怨敌所乐见,会降临于易怒的男女身上。哪七种呢?比丘们,此处,怨敌对自己仇敌这样期望:‘啊,但愿此人容貌丑陋!’是何缘故?比丘们,因为怨敌不会因仇敌容貌端严而欢喜。比丘们,一个易怒的人,被忿怒所压倒、所支配,即使他好好沐浴,仔细涂香,修剪须发,穿着洁净的白衣,但由于被忿怒掌控,他仍是丑陋的。比丘们,这就是第一种怨敌所希求、怨敌所乐见,会降临于易怒者身上的法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattime , bhikkhave, dhammā sapattakantā sapattakaraṇā kodhanaṃ āgacchanti itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā. Katame satta? Idha, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa evaṃ icchati, ‘aho vatāyaṃ dubbaṇṇo assā’ti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa vaṇṇavatāya nandati. Kodhanoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo kodhābhibhūto kodhapareto kiñcāpi so hoti sunhāto suvilitto kappitakesamassu odātavatthavasano, atha kho so dubbaṇṇova hoti kodhābhibhūto. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamo dhammo sapattakanto sapattakaraṇo kodhanaṃ āgacchati itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā.
再者,比丘们,怨敌对自己仇敌这样期望:‘啊,但愿他痛苦地躺卧!’……‘但愿他不得利益!’……‘但愿他没有财富!’……‘但愿他没有名声!’……‘但愿他没有朋友!’……‘但愿他身坏命终之后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱!’是何缘故?比丘们,因为怨敌不会因仇敌往生善趣而欢喜。比丘们,易怒的人,被忿怒所压倒、所夺心,以身体行恶行,以言语行恶行,以心意行恶行。他如此以身体、言语、心意行了恶行之后,身坏命终,便投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,他正是被忿怒所制伏者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa evaṃ icchati ‘aho vatāyaṃ dukkhaṃ sayeyyā’ti…pe… na pacurattho assāti…pe… na bhogavā assāti…pe… na yasavā assāti…pe… na mittavā assāti…pe… kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjeyyāti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa sugatigamane nandati. Kodhanoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo kodhābhibhūto kodhapareto kāyena duccaritaṃ carati, vācāya duccaritaṃ carati, manasā duccaritaṃ carati. So kāyena duccaritaṃ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṃ caritvā manasā duccaritaṃ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā…pe… nirayaṃ upapajjati kodhābhibhūto’’ti (a. ni. 7.64).
「忿怒者不知义」:忿怒之人不识利益,「忿怒者不见法」:忿怒之人不解法……(中略)……(《增支部》7.64)
当弃舍嗔怒,断除慢心,超越一切结缚。
嗔怒非义所生,嗔怒能令心扰……(中略)……
斩断嗔怒,便得安眠;斩断嗔怒,便无忧伤。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati…pe…. (a. ni. 7.64); ‘‘Kodhaṃ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṃ, saṃyojanaṃ sabbamatikkameyya. (dha. pa. 221); ‘‘Anatthajanano kodho, kodho cittappakopano…pe…. (a. ni. 7.64); ‘‘Kodhaṃ chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kodhaṃ chetvā na socati; Kodhassa visamūlassa, madhuraggassa brāhmaṇā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187); ‘‘Ekāparādhaṃ khama bhūripañña, Na paṇḍitā kodhabalā bhavantī’’ti. –
如此,以观察嗔的过患及与此相反的断嗔功德为缘,在基础阶段,依彼分断等方式暂伏嗔心,进而策励修观,最终由第三道彻底断除嗔恚。这便是告诫那些比丘:‘诸比丘,当断此一法,即嗔。’因此说:‘诸比丘,当断除一法,即嗔。’所谓‘心被嗔害者’:因愤恨而心受染污,故称心被嗔害者。此处其余当说之义,皆按初经注释之法了知。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā nayena dose ādīnave vuttappaṭipakkhato dosappahāne ānisaṃse ca paccavekkhitvā pubbabhāge dosaṃ tadaṅgappahānādivasena pajahitvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena sabbaso dosaṃ samucchindatha, pajahathāti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tattha niyojanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dosaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahathā’’ti. Duṭṭhāseti āghātena dūsitacittatāya paduṭṭhā. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayameva.
第3经 痴经注释显示巴利原文
3. Mohasuttavaṇṇanā
3 第三经中,‘痴’即是无知。它是对苦的无知、对苦集的无知、对苦灭的无知、对导向苦灭之道的无知。以此方式,虽有多重分类,但皆因痴而迷惘。因其自身迷惘,或仅为迷惘本身,故称为‘痴’。其特相是令心盲目,或说以无知为相;其作用是不得通达,或说遮蔽所缘的自性;其现起是不如理作意,或说如黑暗一般;其近因是不如理作意。应知,此乃一切不善法之根。此处,‘应断除’句的含义,显示巴利原文
3. Tatiye mohanti aññāṇaṃ. Tañhi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇantiādinā nayena vibhāgena anekappabhedampi muyhanti. Tena sayaṃ vā muyhati muyhanamattameva vā tanti mohoti vuccati. So cittassa andhabhāvalakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā, asampaṭivedharaso, ārammaṇasabhāvacchādanaraso vā, asammāppaṭipattipaccupaṭṭhāno, andhakārapaccupaṭṭhāno vā, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhāno, sabbākusalānaṃ mūlanti daṭṭhabbo. Idhāpi pajahathāti padassa –
愚者不知义,愚者不见法;当愚痴征服人时,便是大暗冥。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mūḷho atthaṃ na jānāti, mūḷho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ moho sahate naraṃ’’. (itivu. 88); ‘‘Anatthajanano moho…pe…. (itivu. 88); ‘‘Avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ (itivu. 40); ‘‘Mohasambandhano loko, bhabbarūpova dissati’’; (Udā. 70); ‘‘Moho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāya’’ (a. ni. 3.34);
以“凡由欲贪等杂染法所生之法,从义理上说,皆以痴为因”等语句,观察了痴的过患,以及与此相反的、断除痴的功德之后,在预备阶段,修行者以次第断除欲贪等方式,依一分断等形式正在断除痴,最终应由第三道彻底断除如前所述与贪、瞋共存的痴——应如此理解其义。因为此处所指的痴,唯是不来道所断除的。“Mūḷhā”(迷昧者):指对于善与不善、有罪与无罪等差别当中,自己的利益与不利完全迷昧的人。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mūḷho kho, brāhmaṇa, mohena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto diṭṭhadhammikampi bhayaṃ veraṃ pasavati, samparāyikampi bhayaṃ veraṃ pasavatī’’ti ca –
依照此理,应如此观察:“凡由欲贪等染污法所生的法,从本质上说,这一切悉以愚痴为因。”观察了愚痴的过患,并从其对治——断除愚痴这一面观察了功德之后,在前分阶段,修行者随着次第断除欲贪等的进程,以一分断等形式正在断除愚痴,应当依第三道(不来道),以彻底断除的方式,断除前文所述与贪、瞋共存的愚痴。这便是此处应解之义。因为这里所指的愚痴,唯有不来道方能断除。所谓“Mūḷhā”,是指对于善与不善、有罪与无罪等差别中,自己的利与不利全然迷昧之人。其余解释与前面所说相同。显示巴利原文
Ādinā nayena ‘‘yo koci dhammo kāmacchandādisaṃkilesadhammehi nibbattetabbo, atthato sabbo so mohahetuko’’ti ca mohe ādīnavaṃ tappaṭipakkhato mohappahāne ānisaṃsañca paccavekkhitvā kāmacchandādippahānakkameneva pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena mohaṃ pajahantā tatiyamaggena yathāvuttalobhadosekaṭṭhaṃ mohaṃ samucchedavasena pajahathāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Anāgāmimaggavajjho eva hi moho idhādhippetoti. Mūḷhāseti kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjādibhede attano hitāhite sammūḷhā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第四经中,‘kodha’即嗔。嗔本身,因与‘kodha’同义,随顺那些易怒之人的意乐而如此说。因此,此处应以第二经中所说的方式来理解其义。此外,嗔以怒恼为特相,以制造愤恨为作用,以心的破坏状态为现起,并应知它使心变腐——这一差别也应了知。显示巴利原文
4. Kodhasuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四经中,“kodha”即指嗔恚。嗔恚本身,因其与“kodha”同义,是随顺易怒之人的心意而如此称为的。因此,这里应按照第二经所阐明的方式来理解其义。另外,嗔的相是以恼怒为特相,以制造怨恨为作用,以心的破坏状态为现起,还应观见其使心腐坏这一细微的差别。显示巴利原文
4. Catutthe kodhanti dosaṃ. Doso eva hi kodhapariyāyena bujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena evaṃ vutto. Tasmā dutiyasutte vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. Apica kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, āghātakaraṇaraso, cittassa byāpattibhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno, cetaso pūtibhāvoti daṭṭhabboti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
第五经中,‘makkha’即覆藏他人功德。虽然它就像抓取粪秽去打别人的人一样,首先弄脏了自己的手,但由于它生起时的意图是覆藏他人功德,故称为‘覆藏他人功德’。正如擦身布擦去沐浴者身上的水一样,它覆藏、抹去、毁坏他人的功德,又或者因为它抛掷、毁坏他人所成就的大恩惠,而称为‘makkha’。它以覆藏他人功德为特相,以破坏这些功德为作用,以遮蔽这些功德为现起。从义理上说,应知它就是以覆藏他人功德的行相而生起的、伴随忧受的心生起。‘应断除’:在此,观察了所述分类的嗔,以及如前对嗔所述的过患和断除它的功德之后,在预备阶段以彼分断等形式断除,策励修习观,然后以第三道毫无剩余地彻底断除——这是其义。‘Makkhā’(覆藏者):指已覆藏者、覆藏他人功德者,正因如此,也毁坏了自己功德的人。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
5. Makkhasuttavaṇṇanā
5 第五经中,「makkha」是指覆藏他人功德。虽然这种覆藏的行为就像抓取粪秽去打人一样,首先弄脏的是自己的手,但由于它生起时的意图就是覆藏他人的功德,所以被称为「覆藏他人功德」。正如擦身布擦去沐浴者身上的水珠一般,它也同样地覆藏、抹掉、消亡他人的功德;又或者,因为它抛掷、毁坏他人所成就的大恩惠,所以也称为贬损。它以覆藏他人功德为特相,以破坏这些功德为作用,以遮蔽这些功德为现起。应知它在本质上,就是一种以覆藏他人功德的行相而生起的、伴随忧受的心。「应断除」的意思是:观察此处所说的种种嗔,以及如前针对嗔所开示的过患与断除嗔的利益,在前分阶段以彼分断等方式加以断除,并使观智精进,最终以第三道毫无剩余地斩断。所谓「Makkhā」,是指已经贬损的人、贬损他人功德的人;正因如此,他也就毁坏了自己的功德。其余的解释与前面所说相同。显示巴利原文
5. Pañcame makkhanti paraguṇamakkhanaṃ. Yadipi hi so gūthaṃ gahetvā paraṃ paharanto viya attano karaṃ paṭhamataraṃ makkhatiyeva, tathāpi paresaṃ guṇamakkhanādhippāyena pavattetabbattā ‘‘paraguṇamakkhano’’ti vuccati. Tathā hi so udakapuñchanamiva nhātassa sarīragataṃ udakaṃ paresaṃ guṇe makkheti puñchati vināseti , parehi vā katānaṃ mahantānampi kārānaṃ khepanato dhaṃsanato makkhoti vuccati. So paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo, tesaṃ vināsanaraso, tadavacchādanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Atthato pana paresaṃ guṇamakkhanākārena pavatto domanassasahagatacittuppādoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pajahathāti tattha vuttappabhedaṃ dosaṃ, dose ca vuttanayaṃ ādīnavaṃ, pahāne cassa ānisaṃsaṃ paccavekkhitvā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena pajahantā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena anavasesaṃ samucchindathāti attho. Makkhāseti makkhitā makkhitaparaguṇā, paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhitāro, tato eva attanopi dhaṃsitaguṇāti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第六·慢经注释显示巴利原文
6. Mānasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六经中,「慢」是指以出身等为所依而生起的心高举。因为它以‘我是较优胜者’等方式去思量,或者它自身就这么思量,又或者它有衡量、抬高的性质,所以才称为「慢」。这种慢可分三种:我是较优胜者的慢、我是相等者的慢、我是较劣者的慢。进而又可细分为九种:较优胜者生起‘我是较优胜者’的慢,较优胜者生起‘我是相等者’的慢,较优胜者生起‘我是较劣者’的慢;相等者生起‘我是较优胜者’的慢,相等者生起‘我是相等者’的慢,相等者生起‘我是较劣者’的慢;较劣者生起‘我是较优胜者’的慢,较劣者生起‘我是相等者’的慢,较劣者生起‘我是较劣者’的慢。这九种慢皆以心的高举为「相」(特征),或以执取‘我’为「味」(作用),或以高举为味;它的「现起」(表现)是内心像充气膨胀一般,或者表现为渴望出人头地;它的「足处」(近因)是与邪见不相应的贪爱,应当把它视若疯狂。「应断除」的意思是:应当观察慢的过患——它是一切抬高自己、贬低他人之相的根源;也是对于应恭敬者不去行合掌礼、不履行应作义务等事的因;还是以出身骄、显示巴利原文
6. Chaṭṭhe mānanti jātiādivatthukaṃ cetaso unnamanaṃ. So hi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā nayena maññanti tena, sayaṃ vā maññati, mānanaṃ sampaggahoti vā mānoti vuccati. Svāyaṃ seyyohamasmīti māno, sadisohamasmīti māno, hīnohamasmīti mānoti evaṃ tividho. Puna seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno, seyyassa sadiso, seyyassa hīno; sadisassa seyyo, sadisassa sadiso, sadisassa hīno; hīnassa seyyo, hīnassa sadiso, hīnassa hīnohamasmīti mānoti evaṃ navavidhopi unnatilakkhaṇo, ahaṃkāraraso, sampaggaharaso vā, uddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno, ketukamyatāpaccupaṭṭhāno vā, diṭṭhivippayuttalobhapadaṭṭhāno ummādo viyāti daṭṭhabbo. Pajahathāti tassa sabbassapi attukkaṃsanaparavambhananimittatā, garuṭṭhāniyesu abhivādanapaccupaṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammādīnaṃ akaraṇe kāraṇatā, jātimadapurisamadādibhāvena pamādāpattihetubhāvoti evamādibhedaṃ ādīnavaṃ tappaṭipakkhato niratimānatāya ānisaṃsañca paccavekkhitvā rājasabhaṃ anuppatto caṇḍālo viya sabrahmacārīsu nīcacittataṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena taṃ pajahantā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmimaggena samucchindathāti attho. Anāgāmimaggavajjho eva hi māno idhādhippeto. Mattāseti jātimadapurisamadādivasena mānena pamādāpattihetubhūtena mattā attānaṃ paggahetvā carantā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在这六部按照次第排列的经或偈颂中,世尊的开示最终都是以证得不来果结束的。其中,依再生之有的不同,有五种不来者,即生于无烦天、无热天、善现天、善见天和色究竟天者。生于无烦天者,就叫做‘无烦天’。他们又有五种:中般涅槃者、生般涅槃者、无行般涅槃者、有行般涅槃者、上流至色究竟天者。无热天、善现天、善见天的情况也同样如此。而在色究竟天那里,则除去了‘上流至色究竟天者’这一种(因为色究竟天本身是终点,再无上流)。
其中,一位在无烦天等处投生后,在寿命还没有超过中间阶段时就证得阿拉汉果,因而以烦恼灭尽的般涅槃而般涅槃,这叫做「中般涅槃者」。另一位在无烦天等处,寿命超过了中间阶段(例如五百劫等寿量的中间)之后才般涅槃,这叫做「生般涅槃者」;那位不用刻意精勤、没有太多痛苦、不费力气就般涅槃的,叫做「无行般涅槃者」;那位必须刻意精勤、经历痛苦、艰难、费力而般涅槃的,叫做「有行般涅槃者」。还有一种情况:在无烦天等处投生后,不能证得阿拉汉果,就在那里活完应享的寿命,随后再以结生的方式前往色究竟天。由于他的渴爱之流、轮转之流,或者纯是道之流,是向上而行的,所以称为「上流」;又因为他前往色究竟天,所以称为「至色究竟天者」。显示巴利原文
Imesu pana paṭipāṭiyā chasu suttesu gāthāsu vā anāgāmiphalaṃ pāpetvā desanā niṭṭhāpitā. Tattha ye ime avihā atappā sudassā sudassī akaniṭṭhāti upapattibhavavasena pañca anāgāmino, tesu avihesu upapannā avihā nāma. Te antarāparinibbāyī, upahaccaparinibbāyī, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīti pañcavidhā, tathā atappā, sudassā, sudassino. Akaniṭṭhesu pana uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī parihāyati. Tattha yo avihādīsu uppajjitvā āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā arahattappattiyā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ antarāparinibbāyī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu ādito pañcakappasatādibhedaṃ āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ upahaccaparinibbāyī nāma. Yo asaṅkhārena adhimattappayogaṃ akatvā appadukkhena akasirena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī nāma. Yo pana sasaṅkhārena adhimattappayogaṃ katvā dukkhena kicchena kasirena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī nāma. Itaro pana avihādīsu uddhaṃvāhitabhāvena uddhamassa taṇhāsotaṃ, vaṭṭasotaṃ, maggasotameva vāti uddhaṃsoto. Avihādīsu uppajjitvā arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkonto tattha tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī.
于此,当知有四句分别:上流而趣色究竟天者、上流而不趣色究竟天者、非上流而趣色究竟天者、非上流而不趣色究竟天者。如何理解?若从无烦天开始,遍历四天界,往生色究竟天并于彼处般涅槃,则名为“上流而趣色究竟天者”。若经历下三天界后,止于善见天般涅槃,则名为“上流而不趣色究竟天者”。若直生色究竟天般涅槃,则名为“非上流而趣色究竟天者”。若于下四天界任一处受生,即于彼处般涅槃,则名为“非上流而不趣色究竟天者”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī, na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmīti catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Yo avihato paṭṭhāya cattāro devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā tayo devaloke sodhetvā sudassīdevaloke ṭhatvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo ito akaniṭṭhameva gantvā parinibbāyati , ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā catūsu devalokesu tattha tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāmāti.
于彼处,生无烦天者中有三种中般涅槃者:超过百劫而般涅槃者、于二百劫圆满时般涅槃者、未及五百劫而般涅槃者。诚如经中所说:“或正生已,或未至中。”其中“或”字,亦含摄了“恰至中”的情形。如是,无烦天有中般涅槃者三、生般涅槃者一、上流者一。于此诸类中,无行般涅槃者五、有行般涅槃者五,合为十种。无热天、善现天、善见天亦各有十种,共四十种。色究竟天则无上流者,故有中般涅槃者三、生般涅槃者一,由是无行般涅槃者四、有行般涅槃者四,共八种。如是一切不来者,总计四十八种。当知此诸种类,悉为他们经中不别而说之文所摄。显示巴利原文
Tattha avihesu uppajjitvā kappasatato uddhaṃ parinibbāyiko, dvinnaṃ kappasatānaṃ matthake parinibbāyiko, pañcakappasate asampatte parinibbāyikoti tayo antarāparinibbāyino. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘upapannaṃ vā samanantarā appattaṃ vā vemajjha’’nti (pu. pa. 36). Vā-saddena hi pattamattopi saṅgahitoti. Evaṃ tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī eko uddhaṃsoto. Tesu asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañca, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañcāti dasa honti. Tathā atappāsudassāsudassīsūti cattāro dasakā cattārīsaṃ akaniṭṭhe pana uddhaṃsotassa abhāvato tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyīti asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāro, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāroti aṭṭha, evamete aṭṭhacattārīsaṃ anāgāmino. Te sabbepi imesu suttesu avisesavacanena gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第七·一切遍知经注释显示巴利原文
7. Sabbapariññāsuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七经中,“一切”:指无余。此“一切”一词,乃是无余之能诠。其关联于何者,即显明彼者之无余性,例如“一切色”“一切受”“一切有身所摄诸法”等句。然此“一切”一词,依其有分际与无分际之境域,分为二种。盖此词于四种境域中被见使用:即一切之一切、部分之一切、处之一切、有身之一切。其中,于“一切法以一切相现于佛陀、世尊智门之前”等句,用于“一切之一切”。于“舍利弗,我以略说开示部分之一切”等句,用于“部分之一切”。于“诸比丘,我将为汝等宣说一切,即眼与色……乃至意与法”中,用于“处之一切”。于“诸比丘,我将为汝等宣说一切法根本分别”等句,用于“有身之一切”。此中,用于“一切之一切”时,为无分际之境域;余三者为有分际之境域。而于此经中,当知指“有身之一切”。盖因作为观行所缘之三界法,于此中悉皆无余地被执取为“一切”。显示巴利原文
7. Sattame sabbanti anavasesaṃ. Anavasesavācako hi ayaṃ sabba-saddo. So yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpeti; yathā ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ, sabbā vedanā, sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesū’’ti. So panāyaṃ sabba-saddo sappadesanippadesavisayatāya duvidho. Tathā hesa sabbasabbaṃ, padesasabbaṃ, āyatanasabbaṃ, sakkāyasabbanti catūsu visayesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tattha ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputtā, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) padesasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, cakkhuñceva rūpañca…pe…. Manañceva dhamme cā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23-25) ettha āyatanasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) sakkāyasabbasmiṃ. Tattha sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato nippadesavisayo, itaresu tīsupi āgato sappadesavisayo . Idha pana sakkāyasabbasmiṃ veditabbo. Vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakadhammā hi idha ‘‘sabba’’nti anavasesato gahitā.
“不遍知”:对于一切应遍知之法,如“这些法是善,这些法是不善,这些法有过失,这些法无过失”等,以及“这是五蕴,这是十二处,这是十八界,这是苦圣谛,这是苦集圣谛”等,不能如其不颠倒的真实体性而以殊胜智慧遍知。“不遍了”:即不能完全了知。因为,完全了知一切三界诸法者,乃是以三种遍知而完全了知,即:知遍知、度遍知、断遍知。其中,什么是知遍知?即对于一切三界的名色,“这是色,色的种类仅此,无有更多;这是名,名的种类仅此,无有更多”,依地、净色等的差别而确立色,依触等的差别而确立名,并依相、味、现起、足处而确定;同时了知它们以无明等为缘。此是知遍知。什么是度遍知?即如此了知之后,以无常、苦、如病等四十二种行相观察这一切。此是度遍知。什么是断遍知?即如此观察之后,以最上的圣道断除对这一切的欲贪。此是断遍知。显示巴利原文
Anabhijānanti ‘‘ime dhammā kusalā, ime akusalā, ime sāvajjā, ime anavajjā’’tiādinā ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā, imāni dvādasāyatanāni, imā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ariyasacca’’nti ca ādinā sabbe abhiññeyye dhamme aviparītasabhāvato anabhijānanto abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena na jānanto. Aparijānanti na parijānanto. Yo hi sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti – ñātapariññāya, tīraṇapariññāya, pahānapariññāya. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ nāmarūpaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo. Idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti bhūtappasādādippabhedaṃ rūpaṃ, phassādippabhedaṃ nāmañca, lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānato vavatthapeti. Tassa avijjādikañca paccayaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā taṃ sabbaṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi. Ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena sabbasmiṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Ayaṃ pahānapariññā.
见清净与度疑清净中的智慧,也属于知遍知。从道非道如实知见清净,至对名色进行聚思维等,直至随顺智之间的种种智慧,属于度遍知。以圣道断除烦恼,则属于断遍知。能完全了知一切者,即通过这三种遍知而完全了知。然而,在此经中,由于“离贪”与“断除”是以遮止的方式被分别强调,故应将这里的“遍了知”理解为依于知遍知与度遍知。对于不能如此完全了知的人,世尊便说“不遍了”。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiyopi ñātapariññā. Maggāmaggapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiyo kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā vā paññā tīraṇapariññā. Ariyamaggena pajahanaṃ pahānapariññā. Yo sabbaṃ parijānāti, so imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti. Idha pana virāgappahānānaṃ paṭikkhepavasena visuṃ gahitattā ñātapariññāya tīraṇapariññāya ca vasena parijānanā veditabbā. Yo panevaṃ na parijānāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘aparijāna’’nti.
其中,“心不远离”:对于应当遍知、应当完全了知的殊胜境界,不使自己的心相续远离贪染,即不能离贪;意思是,不令离贪随观生起,以使贪爱不再产生。“不摒弃”:不能以与观智相应的圣道智慧,毫无剩余地舍弃应断的烦恼轮转。正如这些词的含义,应当了知“遍知”等,也是结合预备阶段与圣道来理解的。因为在预备阶段,依各别心识的作用,以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知次第成就“遍知”等;而在证道的刹那,唯有一种智慧生起,依其自身的作用而成就这一切。“无有能力尽灭苦”:对于涅槃,即彻底舍弃整个轮回之苦,他不能胜任、不相应、没有能力。显示巴利原文
Tattha cittaṃ avirājayanti tasmiṃ abhiññeyyavisese pariññeyye attano cittasantānaṃ na virājayaṃ, na virajjanto; yathā tattha rāgo na hoti, evaṃ virāgānupassanaṃ na uppādentoti attho. Appajahanti vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya tattha pahātabbayuttakaṃ kilesavaṭṭaṃ anavasesato na pajahanto. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ abhijānanādayopi missakamaggavasena veditabbā. Pubbabhāge hi nānācittavasena ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāhi kamena abhijānanādīni sampādetvā maggakāle ekakkhaṇeneva kiccavasena taṃ sabbaṃ nipphādentaṃ ekameva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti. Abhabbo dukkhakkhayāyāti nibbānāya sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa khepanāya na bhabbo, nālaṃ na samatthoti attho.
在“凡一切且”句中,“且”字表简别,“凡”字表限定。二者共同显示从遍知等所应获得的殊胜,以及苦灭的唯一之因。遍知等方面当说的内容,前文已述;然而,彼处是以遮遣的方式而言,此处则应以成立的方式而解,这便是差异所在。再者,“遍知”是指,就自相与缘生等角度,以慧现前把握被称为五取蕴的有身之一切法,成为真实的遍知者,并借由把握其坏灭行相,以无常等诸相将其清晰地限定,从而成为遍知者。“令离染”是指,正因为如此如实通达了无常等特性,激起了怖畏、过患与厌离等慧的力量,令自心离染,于中不再生起丝毫贪爱。“令断”是指,以结合了导向出起的观慧之圣道智,断除、根除属于集边的烦恼轮转。“堪能于苦尽”是指,由于如此断除了烦恼垢秽,一切业轮转皆已穷尽;为了彻底弃舍所有果报轮转,或为了穷尽整个轮回之苦,或为了证入无余涅槃界,他确实能够证得此。这便是此句的意义所在。显示巴利原文
Sabbañca khoti ettha ca-saddo byatireke, kho-saddo avadhāraṇe. Tadubhayena abhijānanādito laddhabbaṃ visesaṃ dukkhakkhayassa ca ekantakāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Abhijānanādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva. Tattha pana paṭikkhepavasena vuttaṃ, idha vidhānavasena veditabbaṃ. Ayameva viseso. Apica abhijānanti upādānakkhandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ sarūpato paccayato ca ñāṇassa abhimukhīkaraṇavasena abhijānanto hutvā abhāvākārādipariggahena taṃ aniccādilakkhaṇehi paricchijjamānavasena parijānanto. Virājayanti sammadevassa aniccatādiavabodhena uppannabhayādīnavanibbidādiñāṇānubhāvena attano cittaṃ virattaṃ karonto tattha aṇumattampi rāgaṃ anuppādento. Pajahanti vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya samudayapakkhiyaṃ kilesavaṭṭaṃ pajahanto samucchindanto. Bhabbo dukkhakkhayāyāti evaṃ kilesamalappahāneneva sabbassa kammavaṭṭassa parikkhīṇattā anavasesavipākavaṭṭakhepanāya sakalasaṃsāravaṭṭadukkhaparikkhayabhūtāya vā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā bhabbo ekantenetaṃ pāpuṇitunti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“凡从一切方面了知一切者”:其中,“凡”指已具相应修行、生起观慧的瑜伽行者。“一切”指三界所摄的一切法。“从一切方面”指依一切部分,即如善等蕴等分类,又如苦性、逼迫性等分类;或者,“从一切”指从硬、触等自相,从无常等一切行相。如此了知后,以观为前导的道慧通达;或仅以观慧作为遍知的原因。“于一切处不染著”:对于依过去等而有种种差别的一切有身诸法,他因证得圣道而不再生起贪著,故不染著。借此显示其已无渴爱的执取,同时也显示已无“这是我的”、“这是我”、“这是我的自我”这三种邪执。“彼”中,“sa”仅为语助词,“ve”意为明确地、绝对地,为一语气词。“以一切遍知”:因为遍知了一切,即通过现观完全了知了前文所述的一切法。“彼”:即前文所说的修行者,或谓圣者。“超越了一切苦”:即超越、度越了轮回中一切的苦。显示巴利原文
Yo sabbaṃ sabbato ñatvāti yo yuttayogo āraddhavipassako sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ sabbato sabbabhāgena kusalādikkhandhādivibhāgato dukkhādipīḷanādivibhāgato ca. Atha vā sabbatoti sabbasmā kakkhaḷaphusanādilakkhaṇādito aniccādito cāti sabbākārato jānitvā vipassanāpubbaṅgamena maggañāṇena paṭivijjhitvā, vipassanāñāṇeneva vā jānanahetu. Sabbatthesu na rajjatīti sabbesu atītādivasena anekabhedabhinnesu sakkāyadhammesu na rajjati, ariyamaggādhigamena rāgaṃ na janeti. Imināssa taṇhāgāhassa abhāvaṃ dassento taṃ nimittattā diṭṭhamānaggāhānaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti imassa micchāgāhattayassapi abhāvaṃ dasseti. Sa veti ettha sa-iti nipātamattaṃ. Ve-ti byattaṃ, ekaṃsenāti vā etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Sabbapariññāti sabbaparijānanato, yathāvuttassa sabbassa abhisamayavasena parijānanato. Soti yathāvutto yogāvacaro, ariyo eva vā. Sabbadukkhamupaccagāti sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ accagā atikkami, samatikkamīti attho.
第八经 慢遍知经注释显示巴利原文
8. Mānapariññāsuttavaṇṇanā
8 第八部经的注疏:此经并无新内容,全然是围绕“慢”而展开的教说。在偈颂中,“这些众生为慢所系”:众生,指因业与烦恼而生起,故得“众生”之名的有情,他们被具有想象特征的慢所系着、所跟随。“被慢的结缚紧绑,乐于存在”:意思是,即使是在虫、蛆、飞蛾等生命形态中,也为慢所缠缚,与慢结相应。正因如此,长时熏习的我执,便对诸行强力执取“这是我的”,并由于常、乐、我、净等颠倒,而乐于欲有等种种存在。“不遍知慢”:指不以三种遍知来遍知慢,或未以阿拉汉道的智慧超越慢;也有人读作“不遍知慢已”。“成为后有的来者”:即成为未来再生有之来者。或者,由于一再生起,在称为“后有”的轮回中相续往来、趋入,即不能从存在中解脱之义。“而那些已断除慢,于慢灭尽中解脱的人”:指那些以阿拉汉道彻底断除了慢,在慢究竟灭尽的阿拉汉果位或涅槃中,以与彼同在的一切烦恼之解脱而善解脱、彻底解脱的人。“他们是慢结的阿毗浮,超越了一切苦”:指那些已尽后有结的阿拉汉,以彻底断除的方式完全摧毁了慢的缠缚与慢之结,因而超越了轮回中的一切苦。显示巴利原文
8. Aṭṭhame apubbaṃ natthi, kevalaṃ mānavasena desanā pavattā. Gāthāsu pana mānupetā ayaṃ pajāti kammakilesehi pajāyatīti pajāti laddhanāmā ime sattā maññanalakkhaṇena mānena upetā upagatā. Mānaganthā bhave ratāti kimikīṭapaṭaṅgādiattabhāvepi mānena ganthitā mānasaṃyojanena saṃyuttā. Tato eva dīgharattaṃ paribhāvitāhaṃkāravasena ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti saṅkhāresu ajjhosānabahulattā tattha niccasukhaattādivipallāsavasena ca kāmādibhave ratā. Mānaṃ aparijānantāti mānaṃ tīhi pariññāhi na parijānantā. Arahattamaggañāṇena vā anatikkamantā, ‘‘mānaṃ apariññāyā’’ti keci paṭhanti. Āgantāro punabbhavanti puna āyātiṃ upapattibhavaṃ. Punappunaṃ bhavanato vā punabbhavasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ aparāparaṃ parivattanavasena gantāro upagantāro honti, bhavato na parimuccantīti attho. Ye ca mānaṃ pahantvāna, vimuttā mānasaṅkhayeti ye pana arahattamaggena sabbaso mānaṃ pajahitvā mānassa accantasaṅkhayabhūte arahattaphale nibbāne vā tadekaṭṭhasabbakilesavimuttiyā vimuttā suṭṭhu muttā. Te mānaganthābhibhuno, sabbadukkhamupaccagunti te parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanā arahanto sabbaso mānaganthaṃ mānasaṃyojanaṃ samucchedappahānena abhibhavitvā ṭhitā, anavasesaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ atikkamiṃsūti attho. Evametasmiṃ sattamasutte ca arahattaṃ kathitanti.
第九、第十部经:《贪遍知经》与《嗔遍知经》两部经的注疏显示巴利原文
9-10. Lobhadosapariññāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10 第九、第十部经中,并无新的内容。应当理解,这或是为了让说法更为优美,或是随顺那些能被如此教化的众生的意乐,而作这般宣说。显示巴利原文
9-10. Navamadasamesu apubbaṃ natthi. Desanāvilāsavasena tathā bujjhanakānaṃ veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vā tathā desitānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
2. 第二品显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyavaggo
《痴遍知经》等经的注疏显示巴利原文
1-3. Mohapariññādisuttavaṇṇanā
11-13 第二品中,前三部经的注释方式与前述相同,开示的缘由亦如前说。显示巴利原文
11-13. Dutiyavaggepi paṭhamādīni tīṇi suttāni vuttanayāneva, tathā desanākāraṇampi vuttameva.
《无明盖经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Avijjānīvaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 在第四部经中,“nāhaṃ, bhikkhave”等词里的“不”是否定词。“我”是世尊自称。“其他”指除了当下所说的无明盖以外的任何事物。“哪怕一种盖”即哪怕一种盖法。“我观见(samanupassāmi)”有两种观见:邪见的观见与正智的观见。其中,“认为色是我”等所说的是邪见的观见;而“观见为无常,非常恒”等所说的是正智的观见。这里是指正智的观见。而且“我观见”此句与否定词“不”相结合。意思是:“比丘们,我即使以称为一切知智的周遍眼,如观掌中果般观察一切法,也见不到任何其他哪怕一种盖。”显示巴利原文
14. Catutthe – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādīsu na-kāro paṭisedhattho. Ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Aññanti idāni vattabbaavijjānīvaraṇato aññaṃ. Ekanīvaraṇampīti ekanīvaraṇadhammampi. Samanupassāmīti dve samanupassanā – diṭṭhisamanupassanā ca ñāṇasamanupassanā ca. Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.200; paṭi. ma. 1.130) āgatā ayaṃ diṭṭhisamanupassanā nāma. ‘‘Aniccato samanupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.35) pana āgatā ayaṃ ñāṇasamanupassanā nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇasamanupassanāva adhippetā. ‘‘Samanupassāmī’’ti ca padassa na-kārena sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātena samantacakkhunā sabbadhamme hatthāmalakaṃ viya olokentopi aññaṃ ekanīvaraṇampi na samanupassāmī’’ti.
“由于此盖,被遮蔽的众生长期流转、轮回”:因为此盖具有盖的体性,它不让人了知、看见、通达法的实际面貌,而是将之覆盖、缠缚而安住。众生被这样的黑暗所遮蔽,于无始的轮回中,于不可计量的劫数,于大小诸有等生存形态中,由于不断地转生,而在一切处“流转”与“轮回”。或者,由于所缘的变化而转移,称为“流转”;由于转生他有的变化而转移,称为“轮回”。或者,烦恼强盛时为“流转”,烦恼微弱时为“轮回”。或者,以刹那死而言,一生之中为“流转”;以世俗死而言,多生之中为“轮回”。或者,随顺心而转起为“流转”,如经中说“彼心驰骋”;随顺业而转起为“轮回”。应如此理解流转与轮回的差别。显示巴利原文
Yena nīvaraṇena nivutā pajā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsarantīti yena nīvaraṇakasabhāvattā nīvaraṇena dhammasabhāvaṃ jānituṃ passituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ adatvā chādetvā pariyonandhitvā ṭhānena andhakārena nivutā sattā anādimatasaṃsāre aparimāṇe kappe mahantesu ceva khuddakesu ca bhavādīsu aparāparuppattivasena sabbato dhāvanti ceva saṃsaranti, ca. Ārammaṇantarasaṅkamanavasena vā sandhāvanaṃ, bhavantarasaṅkamanavasena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Kilesānaṃ balavabhāvena vā sandhāvanaṃ, dubbalabhāvena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Khaṇikamaraṇavasena vā ekajātiyaṃ sandhāvanaṃ, vohāramaraṇavasena anekāsu jātīsu saṃsaraṇaṃ. Cittavasena vā sandhāvanaṃ, ‘‘cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ, kammavasena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sandhāvanasaṃsaraṇānaṃ viseso veditabbo.
“yathayidaṃ”即“如同这个(yathā idaṃ)”。“y”是语词连接,因连音而缩短元音。“无明盖(avijjānīvaraṇa)”:此处,以不应成就之义,身恶行等被称为“不应得(avindiya)”,即不可获得之义。它获得那不应得的,故称为「无明」。反之,身善行等被称为“应得(vindiya)”,它却不获得那应得的,故也称为「无明」。复次,它使蕴的积聚义、处的处义、界的空义、根的增上义、谛的如义,以及苦等以逼迫等方式所说的四种义不被了知,故是「无明」。或者,它令众生在无边的轮回中驱驰,故是「无明」;或于究竟义上不存在的男女等概念中驱驰、现起,而于真实存在的蕴等法上不驱驰、不现起,故是「无明」。又,由于它遮盖眼识等的依处与所缘,以及缘起与缘生法,故也是「无明」。无明本身即是盖,因此称为“无明盖”。显示巴利原文
Yathayidanti yathā idaṃ. Ya-kāro padasandhikaro, sandhivasena rassattaṃ. Avijjānīvaraṇanti ettha pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Viparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ ādhipateyyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Antavirahite saṃsāre satte javāpetīti vā avijjā, paramatthato vā avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati pavattati, vijjamānesu khandhādīsu na javati, na pavattatīti avijjā. Apica cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā. Avijjāva nīvaraṇanti avijjānīvaraṇaṃ.
“比丘们,众生被无明盖所覆蔽,因而长久地在轮回中流转奔徙”——这句是为了进一步强化前文所说之义。又或者说,前面“比丘们,如同这无明盖”是以譬喻开示的角度而说,而此句则是以显示盖的力用而说。然而,为何此处唯说无明,而不说其他法呢?因为无明在遮蔽过患的同时,乃是爱欲等特殊的缘。确实,在它遮蔽了过患的那些对象上,爱欲等便随之生起了。显示巴利原文
Avijjānīvaraṇena hi, bhikkhave, nivutā pajā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsarantīti idaṃ purimasseva daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Purimaṃ vā – ‘‘yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, avijjānīvaraṇa’’nti evaṃ opammadassanavasena vuttaṃ, idaṃ nīvaraṇānubhāvadassanavasena. Kasmā panettha avijjāva evaṃ vuttā, na aññe dhammāti? Ādīnavapaṭicchādanena kāmacchandādīnaṃ visesappaccayabhāvato. Tathā hi tāya paṭicchāditādīnave visaye kāmacchandādayo pavattanti.
“别无其他”等偈颂,是为了统摄已说及未说的义理而宣说的。于此偈中,“被覆蔽”指被障碍、被缠绕,即被覆盖的意思。“日夜”指白昼与夜晚,意谓一切时。“如同被痴所覆”是指:就如那些众生被名为“无明盖”的痴所覆蔽、所遮盖,他们即便对极易了知的事物也无法认知,从而在轮回中流转;像这样的其他任何一个法、任何一种盖都不存在——应当如此连接文意。“而那些人断除了痴,击破了黑暗之蕴”:那些圣弟子们,在预备阶段以暂时舍断等方式,或者通过下下道,断除了各个道所应断的痴,最终以最上道的金刚喻智,击破了那个名为痴的黑暗聚集,彻底无余地断尽。“他们不再流转”:这些阿拉汉——显示巴利原文
Natthaññoti ādikā gāthā vuttassa avuttassa ca atthassa saṅgaṇhanavasena bhāsitā. Tattha nivutāti nivāritā paliguṇṭhitā, paṭicchāditāti attho. Ahorattanti divā ceva rattiñca, sabbakālanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāmohena āvutāti yena pakārena avijjānīvaraṇasaṅkhātena mohena āvutā paṭicchāditā suviññeyyampi ajānantiyo pajā saṃsāre saṃsaranti, tathārūpo añño ekadhammopi ekanīvaraṇampi natthīti yojetabbaṃ. Ye ca mohaṃ pahantvāna, tamokhandhaṃ padālayunti ye pana ariyasāvakā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādippahānavasena, heṭṭhimamaggehi vā taṃtaṃmaggavajjhaṃ mohaṃ pajahitvā aggamaggena vajirūpamañāṇena mohasaṅkhātameva tamorāsiṃ padālayiṃsu, anavasesato samucchindiṃsu. Na te puna saṃsarantīti te arahanto –
诸蕴的次第,以及界与处;
「不间断地转起」:指持续不断地生起,故称为「轮回」。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. –
如此说时,他们在这轮回中不流转、不飘荡。为什么呢?因为他们没有轮回的因。轮回的因、根本因是无明,而他们没有这无明;它已被彻底断除,完全不存。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte imasmiṃ saṃsāre na saṃsaranti na paribbhamanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Hetu tesaṃ na vijjati, yasmā saṃsārassa hetu mūlakāraṇaṃ avijjā, sā tesaṃ na vijjati, sabbaso natthi samucchinnattāti.
第五 爱结经注疏显示巴利原文
5. Ḍtaṇhāsaṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
15 在第五经中,凡是具有它的,它便将该补特伽罗通过诸苦、或通过果报之业、或通过有、生处、趣、识住、有情居、或其他有的差别等连结在一起,故称为「结」。「爱」:从渴求义而言,它自身渴求、令自身遍求,或众生依之而渴求,故称为爱。「被连结的」:即被系缚于眼等执着的所依处。其余的解释如前所说。虽然在这里,无明也有结的性质,爱也有盖的性质,这确实存在,但为了显示「无明覆藏诸有过患,爱则连结众生」这一特殊的区别意义,故在前经中以盖性说无明,而在此处以结性说爱。这也是为了显示盖与结的首要性。正如以盖性说,无明是诸染污法中最主要、最先行者;同样,以结性说爱为诸染污法之首,为了显示依止无明或爱的首要性,在这两部经中,这些法被分别宣说。而且,无明障碍涅槃之乐,故称为「盖」;爱以轮回之苦连结、束缚众生,故称为「结」。显示巴利原文
15. Pañcame yassa vijjati, taṃ puggalaṃ dukkhehi, kammaṃ vā vipākehi, bhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāse vā bhavantarādīhi saṃyojetīti saṃyojanaṃ. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, tasati sayaṃ paritasati, tasanti vā etāyāti taṇhā. Saññuttāti cakkhādīsu abhinivesavatthūsu baddhā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha avijjāyapi saṃyojanabhāvo taṇhāya ca nīvaraṇabhāvo atthiyeva, tathāpi avijjāya paṭicchāditādīnavehi bhavehi taṇhā satte saṃyojetīti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ purimasutte avijjā nīvaraṇabhāvena, idha ca taṇhā saṃyojanabhāveneva vuttā. Kiñca nīvaraṇasaṃyojanappadhānassa dassanatthaṃ. Yathā hi nīvaraṇabhāvena avijjā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ padhānabhūtā pubbaṅgamā ca, evaṃ saṃyojanabhāvena nesaṃ taṇhāti tadadhīnappadhānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ suttadvaye evamete dhammā vuttā. Apica visesena avijjā nibbānasukhaṃ nivāretīti ‘‘nīvaraṇa’’nti vuttā, taṇhā saṃsāradukkhena satte saṃyojetīti ‘‘saṃyojana’’nti.
或者,由于它们成为见与行的障碍、与明行相违,这二法被分别为二。无明是与明直接对立的,特别障碍证见涅槃与不颠倒见;爱是与行法直接对立的,障碍正确的行道(修行之道)。因此,这未受教导的凡夫被无明覆蔽而盲暗,被爱包围束缚,犹如盲人被捆绑,无法超越轮回的旷野。又,为了显示无义之事生起的二种原因,也将这二法分别开示为二。因为陷于无明的补特伽罗,由愚痴而丧失义利,并为自己造作无义的行为,如同不善巧的病人从事不适宜的作为。即使他有知识,若因愚痴,仍会丧失义利、造作无义的行为,正如知病的病人却服用不适宜的药物。《猴胶喻经》即是此义的证明。显示巴利原文
Dassanagamanantarāyakaraṇato vā vijjācaraṇavipakkhato dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Vijjāya hi ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā avijjā nibbānadassanassa aviparītadassanassa ca visesato antarāyakarā, caraṇadhammānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā taṇhā gamanassa sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarāti; evamayaṃ avijjāya nivuto andhīkato taṇhāya saṃvuto baddho assutavā puthujjano andho viya baddho mahākantāraṃ, saṃsārakantāraṃ nātivattati. Anatthuppattihetudvayadassanatthampi dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Avijjāgato hi puggalo bālabhāvena atthaṃ parihāpeti, anatthañca attano karoti, akusalo viya āturo asappāyakiriyāya. Jānantopi bālo bālabhāvena atthaṃ parihāpeti, anatthañca karoti jānanto viya rogī asappāyasevī. Makkaṭālepopamasuttaṃ cetassa atthassa sādhakaṃ.
又,在此为了显示缘起的根本原因,这二法被分别为二。特别地,因为迷乱的力量强盛,无明的领域是过去世;因为希求的力量强盛,爱的领域是未来世。正如愚痴之人多怀迷乱追悔过去,对于他,‘无明缘行’等一切缘起支都应当这样推导。多怀强烈希求的人则渴求未来,对于他,‘爱缘取’等一切支也应当这样推导。因此应知,由无明牵引对前际的执取,由爱连接对后际的结生,这二法便如此依次显示了它们作为根本因的性质。显示巴利原文
Paṭiccasamuppādassa mūlakāraṇadassanatthampettha dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Visesena hi sammohassa balavabhāvato avijjākhettaṃ atīto addhā, patthanāya balavabhāvato taṇhākhettaṃ anāgato addhā. Tathā hi bālajano sammohabahulo atītamanusocati, tassa avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti sabbaṃ netabbaṃ. Patthanābahulo anāgataṃ pajappati, tassa taṇhāpaccayā upādānantiādi sabbaṃ netabbaṃ. Teneva tāsaṃ pubbantāharaṇena aparantapaṭisandhānena cassa yathākkamaṃ mūlakāraṇatā dassitāti veditabbanti.
偈颂中的‘以爱为第二者’,意指以爱为伴侣。爱犹如在无水的旷野中把阳焰当作水,对那些被渴求逼迫、也被无法抵御的痛苦逼迫的众生,通过展现乐味的方式执行伴侣的作用,令他们在诸有等处不生厌离而持续流转。因此,爱被称为人的‘第二者’(伴侣)。难道其他烦恼等就不是导致有生起的缘吗?确实是,但它们并不像爱那样成为特别殊胜的缘。因为爱既能与不善法俱存,也能离于不善法;又能与欲界善法等分离,单独成为色界等善法生起之有的特别缘,正因如此,它被称为集圣谛。‘如是性与异离性’:如是性(此性)与异离性(变为异性)合称如是性异离。具足这两者的,就是具足如是性异离的轮回。其中,‘如是性’指人身的此种状态;‘异离性’指此外其余有情居的状态。或者,各类有情的现有之身为如是性,未来之身为异离性。又或者,任何如此形态的自体是如是性,非此形态的是异离性。他不能超越、不能越过这具足如是性与异离性的轮回,即那蕴、界、处的相续序列。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu taṇhādutiyoti taṇhāsahāyo. Taṇhā hi nirudakakantāre marīcikāya udakasaññā viya pipāsābhibhūtaṃ appaṭikāradukkhābhibhūtampi sattaṃ assādasandassanavasena sahāyakiccaṃ karontī bhavādīsu anibbindaṃ katvā paribbhamāpeti, tasmā taṇhā purisassa ‘‘dutiyā’’ti vuttā. Nanu ca aññepi kilesādayo bhavābhinibbattiyā paccayāva? Saccametaṃ, na pana tathā visesappaccayo yathā taṇhā. Tathā hi sā kusalehi vinā akusalehi, kāmāvacarādikusalehi ca vinā rūpāvacarādikusalehi bhavanibbattiyā visesappaccayo, yato samudayasaccanti vuccatīti. Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti itthabhāvo ca aññathābhāvo ca itthabhāvaññathābhāvo. So etassa atthīti itthabhāvaññathābhāvo saṃsāro, taṃ tattha itthabhāvo manussattaṃ, aññathābhāvo tato avasiṭṭhasattāvāsā. Itthabhāvo vā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppanno attabhāvo, aññathābhāvo anāgatattabhāvo. Evarūpo vā aññopi attabhāvo itthabhāvo, na evarūpo aññathābhāvo. Taṃ itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ saṃsāraṃ khandhadhātuāyatanapaṭipāṭiṃ nātivattati, na atikkamati.
“了知此过患,知贪爱是苦之生起”:意思是,了知贪爱——即此整个轮回之苦的生起、苦的集起——为过患,并如实了知此过患。又或者说,“了知此过患”是指了知前面所说的、无法超越轮回的过患与过失。“知贪爱是苦之生起”:以及按照前述方式,了知贪爱乃是轮回之苦的首要原因。“离爱者无取,具念比丘游行”:由此,通过三种遍知而遍知,增长观智,依道的次第断除贪爱。以最殊胜之道,彻底离爱、无爱;由于对四取中的任何一种都无执取,未来也不再有结生与执取,故称为“无取”。由于正念圆满,恒住正念,故称为“具念”。这位烦恼已尽的比丘便如此游行于世;或者说,他以五蕴的般涅槃,从诸行的相续中出离。此即其义。显示巴利原文
Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti etaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa sambhavaṃ samudayaṃ taṇhaṃ ādīnavaṃ ādīnavato ñatvāti attho. Atha vā etamādīnavaṃ ñatvāti etaṃ yathāvuttaṃ saṃsāranātivattanaṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ ñatvā. Taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti taṇhañca vuttanayena vaṭṭadukkhassa padhānakāraṇanti ñatvā. Vītataṇho anādāno, sato bhikkhu, paribbajeti evaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānanto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā taṇhaṃ vigamento aggamaggena sabbaso vītataṇho vigatataṇho, tato eva catūsu upādānesu kassacipi abhāvena āyatiṃ paṭisandhisaṅkhātassa vā ādānassa abhāvena anādāno, sativepullappattiyā sabbattha satokāritāya sato bhinnakileso bhikkhu paribbaje careyya, khandhaparinibbānena vā saṅkhārappavattito apagaccheyyāti attho.
第六 第一有学经的注释显示巴利原文
6. Paṭhamasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
16 在第六经中,“有学的”:于此,以何义故而称为“有学”?因获得有学法之故,称为“有学”。此正如所说:显示巴利原文
16. Chaṭṭhe sekhassāti ettha kenaṭṭhena sekho? Sekkhadhammapaṭilābhato sekho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“尊者,要怎么样才算是有学呢?比丘,于此,他具足了有学的正见……乃至具足了有学的正定。比丘,达到此程度即是有学。”(《相应部》5.13)显示巴利原文
‘‘Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sekho hotīti? Idha, bhikkhu, sekhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti…pe… sekhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, bhikkhu, sekho hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.13).
再者,因学故,而称为‘有学’。此亦有言:显示巴利原文
Apica sikkhatīti sekho. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“比丘,正因为学,故称为‘有学’。他学什么?他学增上戒,学增上心,学增上慧。比丘,正因为学,故称为‘有学’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sikkhatīti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā sekhoti vuccati. Kiñca sikkhati? Adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati. Sikkhatīti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā sekhoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.86).
即使是善凡夫,若圆满修习随顺行道,持戒具足,守护根门,饮食知量,专精警寤,于初夜后夜致力于修习菩提分法,心怀‘今日或明日我将证得某种沙门果’而安住——此人也因学而被称为‘有学’。在此意义上,并非只有证悟者才是有学,善凡夫也是。他未达到‘心’,故说‘未达心’。‘心’:在‘行于虚空中的罗网,那意行的魔罗’(《相应部》1.151;《大品》33)中,指贪;在‘心、意、识’(《法集论》63, 65)中,指心;在‘未达心的有学死去时,令众人听闻’(《相应部》1.159)中,指阿拉汉果。此处亦指阿拉汉果。因此,意为‘未证得阿拉汉果者’。显示巴利原文
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomappaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati – ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekhoti. Imasmiṃ atthe na paṭivijjhantova sekho adhippeto, atha kho kalyāṇaputhujjanopi. Appattaṃ mānasaṃ etenāti appattamānaso. Mānasanti ‘‘antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33) ettha rāgo mānasanti vutto. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasa’’nti (dha. sa. 63, 65) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Appattamānaso sekho, kālaṃ kayirā jane sutā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.159) ettha arahattaṃ. Idhāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Tena appattaarahattassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“无上”指最胜、无与伦比。“瑜伽安稳”指从四种轭中安稳、无有恼害,即指阿拉汉果。“对于希望者”有两种希望:渴爱的希望与善欲的希望。在“对于希望者,有种种企求,于所构想的事物尚有颤栗”(《经集》908;《大义释》137)中,这里是指渴爱的希望。显示巴利原文
Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ, asadisanti attho. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ anupaddutanti yogakkhemaṃ, arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Patthayamānassāti dve patthanā taṇhāpatthanā, kusalacchandapatthanā ca. ‘‘Patthayamānassa hi jappitāni, pavedhitaṃ vāpi pakappitesū’’ti (su. ni. 908; mahāni. 137) ettha taṇhāpatthanā.
“已截断魔罗之流,已摧毁,已令其尽无残余;
比丘们,你们应当多修习喜悦,应当希求安稳。”(《中部》1.352)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Chinnaṃ pāpimato sotaṃ, viddhastaṃ vinaḷīkataṃ; Pāmojjabahulā hotha, khemaṃ patthetha bhikkhavo’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.352);
此处所说的,正是想做的善欲与希愿。因此,“对希望者而言”意指:希望到达那瑜伽安稳、心倾向于彼、朝向彼、以彼为重者。“安住”是指通过变换一种威仪路来中断另一种威仪路的苦,从而令身体不致倾覆。或者,也可依“以信决定一切行无常而安住”等释来理解此处的含义。“内”指存在于自己、属自身的内在之中。“支”指原因。“这样做了之后”指如此做了之后。“我不见其他任何一支”的简要意思是:比丘们,我认为,将自身相续中生起的内在之支作为一支后,我再也见不到其他任何一种原因,能像如理作意那样带来如此广大的利益。这里的“如理作意”,即适当的作意、导向道途的作意、对无常等以无常等行相所作的作意,或随顺无常等的心转向、专注与作意。这就是如理作意。显示巴利原文
Ettha kattukamyatākusalacchandapatthanā, ayameva idhādhippetā. Tena patthayamānassāti taṃ yogakkhemaṃ gantukāmassa tanninnassa tappoṇassa tappabbhārassāti attho. Viharatoti ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harato. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti adhimuccanto saddhāya viharatī’’tiādinā niddesanayena cettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ajjhattikanti niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte ajjhatte bhavaṃ ajjhattikaṃ. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ. Iti karitvāti evaṃ katvā. Na aññaṃ ekaṅgampi samanupassāmīti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, ajjhattaṃ attano santāne samuṭṭhitaṃ kāraṇanti katvā aññaṃ ekakāraṇampi na samanupassāmi yaṃ evaṃ bahūpakāraṃ, yathayidaṃ yoniso manasikāroti upāyamanasikāro, pathamanasikāro, aniccādīsu aniccādinayeneva manasikāro, aniccānulomikena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro. Ayaṃ yoniso manasikāro.
现在,为了显示如理作意的威力,世尊说:“比丘们,当比丘如理作意时,便能断除不善,修习善法。”其中,“如理作意”即是在四圣谛上作意:“这是苦圣谛,这是苦集圣谛,这是苦灭圣谛,这是导向苦灭的道圣谛。”显示巴利原文
Idāni yoniso manasikārassa ānubhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yoniso, bhikkhave, bhikkhu manasi karonto akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yoniso manasi karontoti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhanirodho ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasacca’’nti catūsu ariyasaccesu yoniso manasikāraṃ pavattento.
这里对含义的阐明如下:虽然此经是笼统地针对有学圣者宣说,但我们在此将依四道共通的方式,简要说明其修行业处。那位以四圣谛为业处的瑜伽行者,先前已在老师跟前学得四圣谛业处:“以爱为因的三界诸蕴是苦,爱是集,二者不转起是灭,证得灭的是道。”他于后时登上观的道途,对三界诸蕴如理作意“这是苦”,即是以适当的方法与途径,既作意又观察。的确,这里是以作意的名称来指称观。他又对那能引生苦的前爱,如理作意“这是苦集”。再者,由于此苦与此集到达这里便止息、不再转起,因此,对那名为涅槃的,他如理作意“这是苦灭”。对能证得灭的八支圣道,他如理作意“这是导向苦灭的道”,也就是以适当的方法与途径,作意并观察。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ atthavibhāvanā – yadipi idaṃ suttaṃ avisesena sekkhapuggalavasena āgataṃ, catumaggasādhāraṇavasena pana saṅkhepeneva kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathayissāma. Yo catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko yogāvacaro ‘‘taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakā khandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodho, nirodhasampāpako maggo’’ti evaṃ pubbe eva ācariyasantike uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhāno. So aparena samayena vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷho samāno tebhūmake khandhe ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca. Vipassanā hi idha manasikārasīsena vuttā. Yā panāyaṃ tassa dukkhassa samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavikā taṇhā, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti yoniso manasi karoti. Yasmā pana idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayañca samudayo idaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti na pavattanti, tasmā yadidaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma , ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti yoniso manasi karoti. Nirodhasampāpakaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca.
此中方法如是:所谓“执著”是对于诸蕴,而非对于离转起。因此,以“于此身中有地界、水界……”(《长部》2.378)等方法,把握四大种及其随后的所造色之后,便确定“此是色蕴”。在这样确定时,对以彼色蕴为所缘而生起的心及心所法,确定“此四种是无色蕴”。随后再确定“此五蕴是苦”。然而,简而言之,它们分为名与色两部分。此名色有因有缘而生起,于是他确定其因缘:以无明、有、爱等为因,以食等为缘。他确定了那些因与因所生之果的自性实相之后,便推度其无常相:“这些法本来无有而生起,生已即灭,故是无常”;推度其苦相:“由于被生灭所逼恼,故是苦”;推度其无我相:“由于不得自在,故是无我”。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upāyo – abhiniveso nāma khandhe hoti, na vivaṭṭe, tasmā ayamattho – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu, āpodhātū’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.378) nayena cattāri mahābhūtāni tadanusārena upādārūpāni ca pariggahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ rūpakkhandho’’ti vavatthapeti. Taṃ vavatthāpayato uppanne tadārammaṇe cittacetasikadhamme ‘‘ime cattāro arūpakkhandhā’’ti vavatthapeti. Tato ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā dukkha’’nti vavatthapeti. Te pana saṅkhepato nāmañca rūpañcāti dve bhāgā honti. Idañca nāmarūpaṃ sahetu sappaccayaṃ uppajjati, tassa ayaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādiko hetu, ayaṃ āhārādiko paccayoti hetuppaccaye vavatthapeti. So tesaṃ paccayānañca paccayuppannānañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘ime dhammā ahutvā bhavanti, hutvā nirujjhanti, tasmā aniccā’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, ‘‘udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā dukkhā’’ti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, ‘‘avasavattanato anattā’’ti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti.
如此推度三相而修观,当生灭智生起时,他将现起的光明等观的染污确定为“这不是道”,而将生灭智本身确定为“圣道的方便,是前分道”,如此分辨道与非道之后,再渐次生起生灭智、坏灭智等,最终证得入流道等。在那一刹那,他以一次通达即通晓四圣谛,以一次现观即现观诸谛。其中,他以遍知通达通晓苦,以断除通达通晓集,从而断除一切不善法;以作证通达通晓灭,以修习通达通晓道,从而修习一切善法。因为圣道从无间的意义说,是以鄙陋应舍等义而称为善,而此道被修习时,一切无过失的菩提分法也都达到修习圆满。如此,如理作意者便能断除不善,修习善法。正如所说:“他如理作意‘这是苦’,如理作意‘这是苦集’……”(《中部》1.21)。另有言:“比丘们!对于成就如理作意的比丘,这是可预期的:他将修习八支圣道,将多修习八支圣道”(《相应部》5.55)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tilakkhaṇāni āropetvā vipassanto udayabbayañāṇuppattiyā uppanne obhāsādike vipassanupakkilese ‘amaggo’ti udayabbayañāṇameva ‘‘ariyamaggassa upāyabhūto pubbabhāgamaggo’’ti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā puna udayabbayañāṇaṃ paṭipāṭiyā bhaṅgañāṇādīni ca uppādento sotāpattimaggādayo pāpuṇāti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri saccāni ekappaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Tattha dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto, samudayaṃ pahānappaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto sabbaṃ akusalaṃ pajahati, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto sabbaṃ kusalaṃ bhāveti. Ariyamaggo hi nippariyāyato kucchitasalanādiatthena kusalo, tasmiñca bhāvite sabbepi kusalā anavajjabodhipakkhiyadhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti. Evaṃ yoniso manasi karonto akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karoti, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.21). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘yoniso manasikārasampannassetaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ – ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.55).
在解释“如理作意”的偈颂中,简要义为:“有学”指正在学习、具足学处,或以学为戒,故称有学。“比丘”指在轮回中见怖畏,故称比丘。对于这样的有学比丘,为了证得最上义——阿拉汉果,再没有其他法能像如理作意那样具有大作用、大利益。为什么呢?因为以如理作意为先导,依四正勤而精进,便能达到苦的灭尽,即染污的生死流转之苦的灭尽、究竟涅槃,因此说如理作意有大作用。显示巴利原文
Yonisomanasikāroti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – sikkhati, sikkhāpadāni tassa atthi, sikkhanasīloti vā sekho. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Tassa sekhassa bhikkhuno uttamatthassa arahattassa pattiyā adhigamāya yathā yoniso manasikāro, evaṃ bahukāro bahūpakāro añño koci dhammo natthi. Kasmā? Yasmā yoniso upāyena manasikāraṃ purakkhatvā padahaṃ catubbidhasammappadhānavasena padahanto, khayaṃ dukkhassa pāpuṇe saṃkilesavaṭṭadukkhassa parikkhayaṃ pariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇe adhigaccheyya, tasmā yoniso manasikāro bahukāroti.
第二有学经注释显示巴利原文
7. Dutiyasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
17 第七经中,「外」指存在于自相续之外者。「善知识性」:若有人具足戒等功德,能断除不善、施设利益,并且以一切方式给予帮助,这样的善友即是善知识,这种具有善知识的状态,便称为善知识性。此处所说的善知识,本身具足信、戒、闻、施、精进、念、定、慧。其中,以信成就故,他深信如来的菩提,因此在众生中不舍弃作为正觉之因的利乐修行;以戒成就故,为同梵行者所喜爱、所崇敬、所尊重,是一位告诫者、呵责恶事者、劝导者,且能忍耐言语;以闻成就故,能宣说关于蕴、处、谛、缘起等甚深之法;以施成就故,少欲、知足、远离独处、不混杂于众;以精进成就故,于自他利益之道中,策励精进;以念成就故,正念现前,具足最上的念与正知,能忆念、追忆久远以前所作、所说之事;以定成就故,不散乱,具有定,心一境性;以慧成就故,无颠倒地了知。他以念探寻善法与不善法的种种趣向,以慧如实了知有情的利益与安乐,以定令心于其中不散乱,以精进制止有情走向不善,引导他们趣入一向的利益。因此说——显示巴利原文
17. Sattame bāhiranti ajjhattasantānato bahi bhavaṃ. Kalyāṇamittatāti yassa sīlādiguṇasampanno aghassa ghātā , hitassa vidhātā sabbākārena upakārako mitto hoti, so puggalo kalyāṇamitto, tassa bhāvo kalyāṇamittatā. Tatrāyaṃ kalyāṇamitto pakatiyā saddhāsampanno hoti sīlasampanno sutasampanno cāgasampanno vīriyasampanno satisampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṃ, tena sammāsambodhihetubhūtaṃ sattesu hitasukhesitaṃ na pariccajati, sīlasampattiyā sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti garu ca bhāvanīyo codako pāpagarahī vattā vacanakkhamo, sutasampattiyā khandhāyatanasaccapaṭiccasamuppādādikānaṃ gambhīrānaṃ kathānaṃ kattā hoti, cāgasampattiyā appiccho hoti santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho, vīriyasampattiyā attano paresañca hitappaṭipattiyaṃ āraddhavīriyo hoti, satisampattiyā upaṭṭhitassati hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā, samādhisampattiyā avikkhitto hoti samāhito ekaggacitto, paññāsampattiyā aviparītaṃ pajānāti. So satiyā kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesanto paññāya sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā samādhinā tattha abyaggacitto hutvā vīriyena satte ahitato nisedhetvā ekantahite niyojeti. Tenevāha –
他是可爱、可敬、应被修习者,是劝告者,且能忍耐批评;
能作甚深之论说,而不于不适当之处驱使人随行。”(《导论》113)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no cāṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti. (netti. 113);
“比丘众,善友能断不善、修习善法”,其义为:此善友因依止善知识,而生起‘业为自作’之智,并令已生起的信心增长;由信心而生者前往亲近,亲近之后听闻正法;听闻该法后,于如来获得信心;由此信心之获得,他便舍离在家生活,趋向出家,成就四遍清净之戒,随力受持头陀功德而修,成为具足十种论事者;他发起精进而住,正念现前,具足正知,于初夜、后夜分中,致力于菩提分法的修习与实践;不久即令观智成就,依圣道而证得,断尽一切不善,亦令一切善法由修习而圆满增长。诚如经中所言:显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇamitto, bhikkhave, bhikkhu akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetīti kalyāṇamitto puggalo kalyāṇamittaṃ nissāya kammassakatāñāṇaṃ uppādeti, uppannaṃ saddhaṃ phātiṃ karoti, saddhājāto upasaṅkamati upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ suṇāti. Taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhati, tena saddhāpaṭilābhena gharāvāsaṃ pahāya pabbajjaṃ anutiṭṭhati, catupārisuddhisīlaṃ sampādeti, yathābalaṃ dhutadhamme samādāya vattati, dasakathāvatthulābhī hoti, āraddhavīriyo viharati upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto, nacirasseva vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggādhigamena sabbaṃ akusalaṃ samucchindati, sabbañca kusalaṃ bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gamento vaḍḍheti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“弥醯,对于有善友、善伴侣、善交往的比丘,这当是可期望的:他将成为具戒者,以巴帝摩卡律仪防护而安住,行处与所行具足,于微细之过失亦见其怖畏,受持学处而修学。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ, meghiya, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ kalyāṇasahāyassa kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ sīlavā bhavissati, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharissati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu, bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhissati, sikkhāpadesu’.
“弥醯,对于有善友……乃至……善于结交的比丘,这当是可期望的:凡是那种能砥砺、适合敞开心扉,纯一导向厌离……乃至……导向涅槃的谈话。即:少欲论、知足论、远离论、不杂处论、发勤精进论、戒论、定论……乃至……解脱智见论。——对于这般谈话,他将能轻易获得、无苦而获得、无难而获得。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ…pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ yāyaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovivaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ – appicchakathā, santuṭṭhikathā, pavivekakathā, asaṃsaggakathā, vīriyārambhakathā, sīlakathā, samādhikathā…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā. Evarūpāya kathāya nikāmalābhī bhavissati akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’.
“弥醯,这是善友……乃至……善于结交的比丘所期望的”:即他将发起精勤而安住,为断除不善法、成就善法,强健有力、坚定勇猛,于善法上不舍弃重任。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ …pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ āraddhavīriyo viharissati akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāya thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu’.
“弥醯,这是善友……乃至……善于结交的比丘所期望的”:即他将成为有慧者,具足那能观照生灭、属圣者、能通达、能正确导向灭尽诸苦的智慧。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ…pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ paññavā bhavissati, udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā’’’ti (udā. 31).
因此应当了知,善友性正是令解脱一切轮回之苦的因缘。所以世尊说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhaparimuccananimittaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha –
“阿难,确实因为依止我为善知识,有生法的众生从生解脱,有老法的众生从老解脱”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mamañhi , ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccanti, jarādhammā sattā jarāya parimuccantī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.129).
因此世尊说:“比丘们,有善友的比丘断除不善,修习善法。”显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘kalyāṇamitto, bhikkhave, bhikkhu akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetī’’ti.
偈颂中,“与承诺俱”(sappatisso):由“承诺”(patissava)的意义,即头顶受持善友的教导、顺从教导之人。或作“给予教导者”(patisso):因安立他人于利乐而使教导转起,故称patisso,即给予教诫者。与这样的patissa共处,以尊重恭敬而行,故为“与给予教导者俱”(sappatisso),即对应当尊重者具足尊重心与殷重心之人。“具恭敬”(sagāravo):具备六种恭敬。“奉行善友的话”(karaṃ mittānaṃ vacanaṃ):履行善友们的教导,依教奉行。“具正知”(sampajāno):具备依于七事的正知。“具念”(patissato):能以念令业处增长成就,具念而行。“次第地”(anupubbena):依止戒清净等清净的次第,以及彼中观的次第、道的次第。“一切结尽”(sabbasaṃyojanakkhayaṃ):显示巴利原文
Gāthāya sappatissoti patissavasaṅkhātena saha patissenāti sappatisso, kalyāṇamittassa ovādaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchako subbacoti attho. Atha vā hitasukhe patiṭṭhāpanena pati isetīti patisso, ovādadāyako. Garuādarayogena tena patissena saha vattatīti sappatisso, garūsu garucittīkārabahulo. Sagāravoti chabbidhenapi gāravena yutto. Karaṃ mittānaṃ vacananti kalyāṇamittānaṃ ovādaṃ karonto yathovādaṃ paṭipajjanto. Sampajānoti sattaṭṭhāniyena sampajaññena samannāgato. Patissatoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ , gametuṃ samatthāya satiyā patissato satokārī. Anupubbenāti sīlādivisuddhipaṭipāṭiyā, tattha ca vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ceva maggapaṭipāṭiyā ca. Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayanti kāmarāgasaṃyojanādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khepanato sabbasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa pariyosānabhūtaṃ arahattaṃ, tassa ārammaṇabhūtaṃ nibbānameva vā. Pāpuṇe adhigaccheyyāti attho. Iti imesu dvīsu suttesu ariyamaggādhigamassa satthārā padhānaṅgaṃ nāma gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
第八 破僧经的注释显示巴利原文
8. Saṅghabhedasuttavaṇṇanā
18 在第八经中,「一法」指的是什么?这是依本经所起的因缘而作出的经文安排。简略而言,由来是这样的——提婆达多令阿阇世执持邪见,通过阿阇世杀害其父频婆娑罗王,又派遣刺客企图杀害世尊,还以推石下山的方式造下出佛身血的恶业。即便做了这些,提婆达多仍未因此臭名远播,直到放出护财象之后,他才声名狼藉。于是大众骚动,纷纷大声议论:“国王竟然做出这样的恶行!”国王听到这些议论后,便中断了先前供养的五百锅饭食,也不再前往侍奉世尊。就连城中之人,对于到他家门前托钵者,连一匙饭食也不加施舍。提婆达多失去了利养与恭敬,为了以伪装求得生存,便走到世尊跟前,乞求五事。世尊以“够了,提婆达多,谁乐于住林野,就让他去住林野吧”等语加以拒绝。于是,提婆达多以这五事去说服那些心智幼稚、喜好粗劣苦行的信众,让五百名跋耆族比丘取筹,破僧之后,率领他们前往象鼻山。那时,两位上首弟子遵照世尊的吩咐,前往那里说法,使那些比丘安住于圣果之后,便将他们全部带了回来。至于那些在提婆达多一方的……显示巴利原文
18. Aṭṭhame ekadhammoti kataroyaṃ suttanikkhepo? Aṭṭhuppattiko. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā – devadatto hi ajātasattuṃ duggahaṇaṃ gāhāpetvā tassa pitaraṃ rājānaṃ bimbisāraṃ tena mārāpetvāpi abhimāre payojetvāpi silāpavijjhanena lohituppādakammaṃ katvāpi na tāvatā pākaṭo jāto, nāḷāgiriṃ vissajjetvā pana pākaṭo jāto. Atha mahājano ‘‘evarūpampi nāma pāpaṃ gahetvā rājā vicaratī’’ti kolāhalaṃ akāsi, mahāghoso ahosi. Taṃ sutvā rājā attanā dīyamānāni pañca thālipākasatāni pacchindāpesi, upaṭṭhānampissa nāgamāsi. Nāgarāpi kulaṃ upagatassa kaṭacchubhattampissa nādaṃsu. So parihīnalābhasakkāro kohaññena jīvitukāmo satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañca vatthūni yācitvā ‘‘alaṃ, devadatta, yo icchati, so āraññiko hotū’’tiādinā (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) bhagavatā paṭikkhitto tehi pañcahi vatthūhi bālaṃ lūkhappasannaṃ janaṃ saññāpento pañcasate vajjiputtake salākaṃ gāhāpetvā saṅghaṃ bhinditvāva te ādāya gayāsīsaṃ agamāsi. Atha dve aggasāvakā satthu āṇāya tattha gantvā dhammaṃ desetvā te ariyaphale patiṭṭhāpetvā ānayiṃsu. Ye panassa saṅghabhedāya parakkamantassa laddhiṃ rocetvā tatheva paggayha ṭhitā saṅghe bhijjante bhinne ca samanuññā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ taṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya ahosi .
提婆达多本人不久也身患重病,病重临终时,他说:“我应当礼敬世尊”,于是被人用床轿抬着走。当轿子在祇园池塘边停下时,大地裂开,他坠入阿鼻地狱。他的身体高达一百由旬,住劫之久,身躯被粗细如棕榈树干的铁桩所贯穿。赞同提婆达多见解的约五百家族及其眷属,也因安住于那种邪见而生于地狱。有一天,比丘们在法堂中议论道:“贤友们,提婆达多破了僧团,造下极为沉重的恶业。”那时,世尊来到法堂,问道:“比丘们,你们此刻聚集一处,是在谈论什么?”当被告知“在谈此事”后,为了显示破僧的过患,世尊宣说了此经。然而,也有人说:“看见提婆达多及其同党就这样生于地狱,世尊出于内心的悲悯,为了显示破僧的过患而宣说了此经。”显示巴利原文
Devadattopi na cirasseva rogābhibhūto bāḷhagilāno maraṇakāle ‘‘satthāraṃ vandissāmī’’ti mañcakasivikāya nīyamāno jetavanapokkharaṇitīre ṭhapito pathaviyā vivare dinne patitvā avīcimhi nibbatti, yojanasatiko cassa attabhāvo ahosi kappaṭṭhiyo tālakkhandhaparimāṇehi ayasūlehi vinividdho. Devadattapakkhikāni ca pañcamattāni kulasatāni tassa laddhiyaṃ ṭhitāni saha bandhavehi niraye nibbattāni. Ekadivasaṃ bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, devadattena saṅghaṃ bhindantena bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ kata’’nti. Atha satthā dhammasabhaṃ upagantvā ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘imāya nāmā’’ti vutte saṅghabhede ādīnavaṃ dassento imaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi. Keci pana bhaṇanti ‘‘devadattassa tappakkhikānañca tathā niraye nibbattabhāvaṃ disvā saṅghabhede ādīnavaṃ dassento bhagavā attano ajjhāsayeneva imaṃ suttaṃ desesī’’ti.
在此,「一法」是指一种不善、有大罪过的法。「世间」指有情世间。「生起时便生起」:在此,当那些导向分裂的纷争等在僧团中发生时,若有人为了宣扬“这是法,这不是法”等十八种破僧事中的任何一种而作出说明,或为了令人生起认同而进行劝告,乃至劝告之后令大众取了筹,此时破僧即称为正在生起;然而,当取了筹之后,若有四人或更多人独立进行诵戒或僧伽羯磨,那时破僧才称为已经生起。那么,破僧在什么情况下称为已生呢?羯磨、诵戒、说明、劝告、取筹——在这五种导致僧团分裂的途径中,以羯磨或诵戒为衡量标准,而说明、劝告、取筹则属于前方便。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekadhammoti eko akusalo mahāsāvajjadhammo. Loketi sattaloke. Uppajjamāno uppajjatīti ettha bhedasaṃvattanikesu bhaṇḍanādīsu saṅghe uppannesupi ‘‘dhammo adhammo’’tiādīsu aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūsu yassa kassaci dīpanavasena voharantesupi tattha rucijananatthaṃ anussāventesupi anussāvetvā salākāya gāhitāyapi saṅghabhedo uppajjamāno nāma hoti, salākāya pana gāhitāya cattāro vā atirekā vā yadā āveṇikaṃ uddesaṃ vā saṅghakammaṃ vā karonti, tadā saṅghabhedo uppajjati nāma. Kate pana tasmiṃ saṅghabhedo uppanno nāma? Kammaṃ, uddeso, vohāro, anussāvanā, salākaggāhoti imesu hi pañcasu saṅghassa bhedakāraṇesu kammaṃ vā uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhā pana pubbabhāgāti.
在“对众多人不利”等句中:由于阻碍大众获得禅那、道等成就,故说“不利”;由于阻碍天界成就,故说“不乐”;由于成为堕入恶趣之因,故说“无义”。或者,依不善法本身而言,是“不利”;由于连真实的利益也没有,即便生于善趣,也会产生身苦与心苦,故说“痛苦”——这是句子的连接。“诸天与人”:这是指出那些在“众多人”中所说的殊胜补特伽罗。另一种解释方式:“对众多人不利”,即对广大的有情群体不利,意指对现法利益与来世利益的无义。“不乐”,即对现法安乐与来世安乐的不利,意指两种痛苦。“无义”,即对究竟义的否定。因为涅槃即是究竟义,于此之上更无他义。“不利”,即对道的否定。因为除了能证得涅槃的道之外,更无更高的利益。“痛苦”,即由于远离圣者的快乐而导致的轮回之苦。因为那些远离圣者之乐、无法证得它的人,便只能在轮回的苦中流转,而除了圣者之乐外,更无更高的快乐。也确曾这样说过:“这种定是现法乐住,而且能带来未来的乐报。”显示巴利原文
Bahujanāhitāyātiādīsu 0.mahājanassa jhānamaggādisampattinivāraṇena ahitāya, saggasampattinivāraṇena asukhāya, apāyūpapattihetubhāvena anatthāya. Akusaladhammavasena vā ahitāya, hitamattassapi abhāvā sugatiyampi nibbattanakakāyikacetasikadukkhāya uppajjatīti sambandho . Devamanussānanti idaṃ ‘‘bahuno janassā’’ti vuttesu ukkaṭṭhapuggalaniddeso. Aparo nayo – bahujanāhitāyāti bahujanassa mahato sattakāyassa ahitatthāya, diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthāyāti attho. Asukhāyāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaasukhatthāya, duvidhadukkhatthāyāti attho. Anatthāyāti paramatthapaṭikkhepāya. Nibbānañhi paramattho, tato uttariṃ attho natthi. Ahitāyāti maggapaṭikkhepāya. Nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttariṃ hitaṃ nāma natthi. Dukkhāyāti ariyasukhavirādhanena vaṭṭadukkhatāya. Ye hi ariyasukhato viraddhā taṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā, te vaṭṭadukkhe paribbhamanti, ariyasukhato ca uttariṃ sukhaṃ nāma natthi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27).
现在,为了直接显示“破僧”的体相,并阐明它绝对是不利等的因,世尊说道:“比丘们,若僧团已分裂……”等等。其中,“已分裂时”是处格表原因,如同“于无财者,若不得财”的用法,意思是“以分裂作为原因”。“相互争论”:是指四众弟子及其同党之间,通过“这是法,这不是法”等方式彼此争论。争论是争吵的前阶段。“威胁”:是指通过制造恐惧来威逼对方,比如宣称“我们要这样那样加害你们”。“周遍讥毁”:是指以出身等为理由而全面讥毁,也就是以十种骂詈事来嘲笑、贬低对方。“彻底抛弃”:是指通过举行驱摈羯磨等,将人逐出僧团。“在那里”:是指在那个僧团分裂中,或者在以分裂为因的那些争论等事中。“原本未净信者”:是指那些不了知三宝功德的人。“不净信”:对于像“这些比丘是法行者、正行者”这样的说法,他们原本对诸比丘应当生起净信的方式,现在不再生起了,也不认为比丘们所说可听、可信了。如此一来,他们对于法和世尊也变为未净信了。“某些人的变异”:是指那些信心尚显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘saṅghabhedo’’ti sarūpato dassetvā tassa ahitādīnaṃ ekantahetubhāvaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘saṅghe kho pana, bhikkhave, bhinne’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhinneti nimittatthe bhummaṃ yathā ‘‘adhanānaṃ dhane ananuppadīyamāne’’ti (dī. ni. 3.91), bhedahetūti attho. Aññamaññaṃ bhaṇḍanānīti catunnaṃ parisānaṃ tappakkhikānañca ‘‘eso dhammo, neso dhammo’’ti aññamaññaṃ vivadanāni. Bhaṇḍanañhi kalahassa pubbabhāgo. Paribhāsāti ‘‘idañcidañca vo anatthaṃ karissāmā’’ti bhayuppādanavasena tajjanā. Parikkhepāti jātiādivasena parito khepā, dasahi akkosavatthūhi khuṃsanavambhanā. Pariccajanāti ukkhepaniyakammakaraṇādivasena nissāraṇā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ saṅghabhede, tannimitte vā bhaṇḍanādike. Appasannāti ratanattayaguṇānaṃ anabhiññā. Na pasīdantīti ‘‘dhammacārino samacārino’’tiādinā yvāyaṃ bhikkhūsu pasādanākāro, tathā na pasīdanti, tesaṃ vā sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ na maññanti. Tathā ca dhamme satthari ca appasannāva honti. Ekaccānaṃ aññathattanti puthujjanānaṃ aviruḷhasaddhānaṃ pasādaññathattaṃ.
在偈颂中,提到“堕恶趣者”等:因为具有投生于恶趣的性质,故称堕恶趣者。在那恶趣中,亦将生于名为阿鼻的大地狱,故称“地狱者”。完整地经过一个中劫而住于其中,故称“劫住者”。乐于名为“破僧”的朋党,故称“乐于朋党者”。因为处于不如法的状态,故是“非法”。又因安住于这种名为“破僧事”的非法中,故称“住于非法者”。“从瑜伽安稳中毁坏”:即从安稳的利乐中毁坏、退失;或者换个说法,由于不被四种轭所侵扰,故阿拉汉果和涅槃称为“瑜伽安稳”,而说从那里面毁坏,那下场就更不必说了。依戒与见一致的意义而和合,故称为僧团;又由此关系,通过同一羯磨等行为的结合,说为“和合”。“已破”:以前面所说的那种破僧特征加以分裂之后。“一劫”:是指寿命的一劫,而这里指的是一个中劫。“于地狱”:是指在阿鼻大地狱中。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ āpāyikotiādīsu apāye nibbattanārahatāya āpāyiko. Tatthapi avīcisaṅkhāte mahāniraye uppajjatīti nerayiko. Ekaṃ antarakappaṃ paripuṇṇameva katvā tattha tiṭṭhatīti kappaṭṭho. Saṅghabhedasaṅkhāte vagge ratoti vaggarato. Adhammiyatāya adhammo. Bhedakaravatthūhi saṅghabhedasaṅkhāte eva ca adhamme ṭhitoti adhammaṭṭho. Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatīti yogakkhemato hitato padhaṃsati parihāyati, catūhi vā yogehi anupaddutattā yogakkhemaṃ nāma arahattaṃ nibbānañca, tato panassa dhaṃsane vattabbameva natthi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññato saṃhataṭṭhena saṅghaṃ, tato eva ekakammādividhānayogena samaggaṃ sahitaṃ. Bhetvānāti pubbe vuttalakkhaṇena saṅghabhedena bhinditvā. Kappanti āyukappaṃ. So panettha antarakappova. Nirayamhīti avīcimahānirayamhi.
第九、僧团和合经的注释显示巴利原文
9. Saṅghasāmaggīsuttavaṇṇanā
19 在第九经中,“一法”指一个善的、无过失的法。若僧团中生起“这是法,这不是法”之类的争论,那么一位爱乐法的智者应当如此反思:“确实有可能发生这样的情况——当争论扩大时,会导致僧团不和乃至僧团分裂。”若那件诤事是由自己引发的,便应如踩到火一般,立刻从中抽身。若是他人所引发,而自己有能力平息,就应鼓起干劲,哪怕远走他方,也要如理而行,令该诤事平息。若自己无力平息,而争论又一再升级、难以止息,就应当鼓励当地那些行为如法、乐于持学的同梵行者,令他们依据法、依据律、依据导师的教法,妥善平息那件诤事。能如此平息诤事、成就僧团和合的善法,正是此处所指的“一法”。此法能够去除那些对陷入纠结的双方比丘、随顺他们的比丘尼、男居士、女居士,乃至守护他们的天神与梵天可能产生的不利、痛苦和染污之法;由于它成为广大福德蕴聚与善果流的起因,所以能为包含天人的世间带来利益和安乐。因此,经文说:“比丘们,有一法,当它出现在世间时,是为了众多人的利益……”等等。显示巴利原文
19. Navame ekadhammoti eko kusaladhammo anavajjadhammo. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā sace saṅghe vivādo uppajjeyya, tattha dhammakāmena viññunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho, panetaṃ vijjati, yadidaṃ vivādo vaḍḍhamāno saṅgharājiyā vā saṅghabhedāya vā saṃvatteyyā’’ti. Sace taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ attanā paggahetvā ṭhito, aggiṃ akkantena viya sahasā tato oramitabbaṃ. Atha parehi taṃ paggahitaṃ sayañcetaṃ sakkoti vūpasametuṃ, ussāhajāto hutvā dūrampi gantvā tathā paṭipajjitabbaṃ, yathā taṃ vūpasammati. Sace pana sayaṃ na sakkoti, so ca vivādo uparūpari vaḍḍhateva, na vūpasammati. Ye tattha patirūpā sikkhākāmā sabrahmacārino, te ussāhetvā yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ yathā vūpasammati, tathā vūpasametabbaṃ. Evaṃ vūpasamentassa yo saṅghasāmaggikaro kusalo dhammo, ayamettha ekadhammoti adhippeto. So hi ubhatopakkhiyānaṃ dveḷhakajātānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, tesaṃ anuvattanavasena ṭhitānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ tesaṃ ārakkhadevatānaṃ yāvadeva brahmānampi uppajjanārahaṃ ahitaṃ dukkhāvahaṃ saṃkilesadhammaṃ apanetvā mahato puññarāsissa kusalābhisandassa hetubhāvato sadevakassa lokassa hitasukhāvaho hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekadhammo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāyā’’tiādi. Tassattho anantarasutte vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Saṅghasāmaggīti saṅghassa samaggabhāvo bhedābhāvo ekakammatā ekuddesatā ca.
在偈颂中,“僧团和合是乐”,是因和合为乐的因缘,故说和合是乐。正如“诸佛出世是乐”(《法句》194)一样。“对和合者的护持”,意思是透过随喜和合来护持那些和合之人,这是与和合相应的护持。其含义是:为了令他们不舍和合,而去接纳、安立并给予助力。“使僧团和合后”:指将已分裂或出现裂痕的僧团,重新变得和谐、和合。“一劫”:指整整一寿命劫那样长的时间。“在天界享乐”:指在欲界天中,以十种方式胜过其他天人,享受天界之乐;由于一切愿望皆已达成,他感到欢喜、喜悦、自在、游戏。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggīti sukhassa paccayabhāvato sāmaggī sukhāti vuttā. Yathā ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo’’ti (dha. pa. 194). Samaggānañcanuggahoti samaggānaṃ sāmaggianumodanena anuggaṇhanaṃ sāmaggianurūpaṃ, yathā te sāmaggiṃ na vijahanti, tathā gahaṇaṃ ṭhapanaṃ anubalappadānanti attho. Saṅghaṃ samaggaṃ katvānāti bhinnaṃ saṅghaṃ rājipattaṃ vā samaggaṃ sahitaṃ katvā. Kappanti āyukappameva. Saggamhi modatīti kāmāvacaradevaloke aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi abhibhavitvā dibbasukhaṃ anubhavanto icchitanipphattiyāva modati pamodati lalati kīḷatīti.
第十、心败坏者经的注释显示巴利原文
10. Paduṭṭhacittasuttavaṇṇanā
20 第十经的起因是什么?正是事情的起因。据说,有一天,比丘们聚集在法堂,生起这番谈论:“贤友们,这里有人广造福德善业,另有人多造恶业,还有人善恶业夹杂。那么,那些造作杂业的人,他们的来世会如何呢?”那时,导师来到法堂,在早已敷设的殊胜佛座上坐下,听到这番谈论后,为了说明“比丘们,临终之际,心若染污,即可预期他将投生恶趣”,便以此事为因缘,开示了这部经。显示巴利原文
20. Dasamassa kā uppatti? Aṭṭhuppattiyeva. Ekadivasaṃ kira bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ sannisinnā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘āvuso, idhekacco bahuṃ puññakammaṃ karoti, ekacco bahuṃ pāpakammaṃ, ekacco ubhayavomissakaṃ karoti. Tattha vomissakārino kīdiso abhisamparāyo’’ti? Atha satthā dhammasabhaṃ upaganvā paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno taṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘bhikkhave, maraṇāsannakāle saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa duggati pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti dassento imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ desesi.
此处,“idha”(在此)是一个表示处所或指示的不变词。它有时是就某个地点而言的,例如“正站在此处,我已成天人”等。有时是就教法而言的,例如“比丘们,正是在此教法中,有(真正的)沙门,有第二位沙门”等。有时仅作填充虚词,例如“比丘们,在此,我已吃饱,心得满足”等。有时是就世间而言的,例如“此处,如来出现于世间”等。而在这里,应理解为是就世间而言。“某位”(ekacca)的意思是一个、某一人。“补特伽罗”(puggala)就是指众生。由于他依种种条件被善与不善业及其果报所充满,又因死亡而消逝,故称“补特伽罗”。“心败坏者”(paduṭṭhacitta):指因瞋恚、愤恨而变得败坏的心;或指被瞋、贪等烦恼所污染的心。在这里,“某位”这个词是“心败坏的补特伽罗”的修饰语。这是对结生业已获得成熟机会的人而说的,即指那些在临终时,已无力从不善心的运作状态中收回心念,并转入善心的人。“如此”(eva):此。显示巴利原文
Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci padesaṃ upādāya vuccati ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369). Katthaci sāsanaṃ upādāya ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo idha dutiyo samaṇo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci padapūraṇamatte ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30). Katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.61). Idhāpi loke eva daṭṭhabbo. Ekaccanti ekaṃ, aññataranti attho. Puggalanti sattaṃ. So hi yathāpaccayaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ tabbipākānañca pūraṇato maraṇavasena galanato ca puggaloti vuccati. Paduṭṭhacittanti padosena āghātena duṭṭhacittaṃ. Atha vā paduṭṭhacittanti dosena rāgādinā padūsitacittaṃ. Ettha ca ekaccanti idaṃ paduṭṭhacittassa puggalassa visesanaṃ. Yassa hi paṭisandhidāyakakammaṃ okāsamakāsi, so tathā vutto. Yassa ca akusalappavattito cittaṃ nivattetvā kusalavasena otāretuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ āsannamaraṇo. Evanti idāni vattabbākāraṃ dasseti. Cetasāti attano cittena cetopariyañāṇena. Cetoti tassa puggalassa cittaṃ. Pariccāti paricchinditvā pajānāmi. Nanu ca yathākammupagañāṇassāyaṃ visayoti? Saccametaṃ, tadā pavattamānaakusalacittavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“在这个时刻”:指在那个时间,或者在那样的因缘和合中,这位补特伽罗会在速行心路过程的最后阶段死去,这是其含义。因为在速行心生起的刹那,是不会有死亡发生的。“如同带来的东西被放置,便如此堕入地狱”:意思是,就像把带来的东西随手放置一样,他完全被自己的业力投进地狱,就那样被安置在那里了。“身体瓦解之后”:指舍弃了这个被执取的五蕴集合体之后。“死后”:指在紧接着的下一刹那,执取一个新的受生五蕴集合体之时。或者,“身体瓦解”是指命根断绝;“死后”是指从死亡的刹那之后。显示巴利原文
Imamhicāyaṃ samayeti imasmiṃ kāle, imāyaṃ vā paccayasāmaggiyaṃ, ayaṃ puggalo javanavīthiyā aparabhāge kālaṃ kareyya ceti attho. Na hi javanakkhaṇe kālaṃkiriyā atthi. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā ābhataṃ kiñci āharitvā ṭhapitaṃ, evaṃ attano kammunā nikkhitto niraye ṭhapito evāti attho. Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ.
“恶趣”等词全都是地狱的同义词。地狱,因为远离了名为“乐”的铁,故称“恶趣”;或者,因为远离了那些作为生天与解脱之因、被认可为福德的善,也称“恶趣”。“苦趣”:指苦的归宿、所依处;或者,因瞋恚众多,由染污业所生的趣,也称为“苦趣”。“陷堕”:指造恶业者身不由己地堕入此处;或者,身体支分遭到破坏、毁坏而坠入此处。“地狱”:因为此处没有名为“乐味”的铁(纯苦无乐),从无乐味的意义上说,称为“地狱”。另外,当单用“恶趣”一词时,指的是畜生道。因为畜生道远离善趣,故是“恶趣”;但它不是“苦趣”,因为其中有具大威力的龙王等存在。当单用“苦趣”一词时,指的是阴灵界。这阴灵界既是“恶趣”也是“苦趣”,因为它远离善趣,且是苦的去处;但它不是“陷堕”,因为它不像阿修罗那样陷堕。当单用“陷堕”一词时,指的是阿修罗众。因为如前所述,它既是“恶趣”也是“苦趣”,更因其从一切成就蕴聚中陷堕,故称“陷堕”。当单用“地狱”一词时,则指阿鼻地狱等许多种类的地狱。而在这里,所有这些词都指地狱。“再生”:指执取结生。显示巴利原文
Apāyantiādi sabbaṃ nirayasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi ayasaṅkhātā sukhā apetoti apāyo; saggamokkhahetubhūtā vā puññasammatā ayā apetotipi apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati; dosabahulattā vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gatītipi duggati. Vivasā nipatanti ettha dukkaṭakammakārino, vinassantā vā ettha nipatanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgāti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo. Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoni vuccati. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo sugatito apetattā, na duggati mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayo. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā, na vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipātattā. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyo. So hi yathāvuttena atthena apāyo ceva duggati ca, sabbasampattisamussayehi vinipatitattā vinipātoti ca vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādianekappakāro nirayova vuccati. Idha pana sabbapadehipi nirayova vutto. Upapajjantīti paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti.
在这些偈颂中,第一首是结集时由负责结集法的长老们所安立的。「了知后」:指先时的行为,即此授记是以智为先的。或者,“了知”一词表原因,如同“见到狮子后产生恐惧”,意为“以了知为因”。「佛陀、在比丘们面前」:指佛陀世尊于自己面前,向比丘们宣说了随后两首偈颂所要说明的义理。其余部分如前所述。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu paṭhamagāthā saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitā. Ñatvānāti pubbakālakiriyā. Ñāṇapubbakañhi byākaraṇaṃ. Hetuattho vā tvā-saddo yathā ‘‘sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’ti, jānanahetūti attho . Buddho, bhikkhūnaṃ santiketi buddho bhagavā attano santike bhikkhūnaṃ etaṃ parato dvīhi gāthāhi vuccamānaṃ atthaṃ byākāsi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
3. 第三品显示巴利原文
3. Tatiyavaggo
净信经注释显示巴利原文
1. Pasannacittasuttavaṇṇanā
21 第三品的初经中:「净信」:指因对三宝的信及对业果的信而心清净。「善趣」:指美好的去处,或乐的归宿,故称善趣。「天」:因色等成就而极为殊胜,故称为天。「世间」:指有情于此处感受福与非福的果报,或以坏灭之义而称世间。此处,言“善趣”时亦含摄人趣,言“天”时则唯指天趣。其余部分如前所述。显示巴利原文
21. Tatiyavaggassa paṭhame pasannacittanti ratanattayasaddhāya kammaphalasaddhāya ca pasannamānasaṃ. Sugatinti sundaraṃ gatiṃ, sukhassa vā gatinti sugatiṃ. Sagganti rūpādisampattīhi suṭṭhu agganti saggaṃ. Lokanti lokiyanti ettha puññapāpaphalāni, lujjanaṭṭheneva vā lokaṃ. Ettha ca sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati, saggaggahaṇena devagati eva. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
慈经的注释显示巴利原文
2. Mettasuttavaṇṇanā
22 在第二经中,“诸比丘,不要害怕福业”这句中,「不要」是一个禁止词。而「福」这个词,在“诸比丘,由于受持善法,故此福增长”等经文中,指福的果报;在“诸比丘,无闻凡夫行福行”等经文中,指欲界与色界的善行;在“识随福而往”等经文中,指成为善趣特殊原因的再生有;在“诸比丘,有三种福业事:施福业事、戒福业事、修福业事”等经文中,指善思。然而此处,应知是指三界中的一切善法。
“不要害怕”——这里的“害怕”有两种:智害怕和染着害怕。其中,在“诸比丘,那些长寿、庄严、多乐、长久居住于高广天宫的诸天,听闻如来说法后,大多生起害怕、悚惧与惊恐”等经文中所说的,就是智害怕;而在“确实生起害怕,确实生起惊悚,确实毛骨悚然”等经文中所说的,就是染着害怕。在此处,同样是仅指染着害怕。
此处其意义是:诸比丘,长久以来所实行的身语约束、戒律的履行、一坐食、独卧、根律仪、以头陀行调伏心、正念正知、依修习业处而策励精进——这些是比丘应当不间断地修习的福业。你们不要害怕它们,不要对它们生起怖畏与惊恐。显示巴利原文
22. Dutiye mā, bhikkhave, puññānanti ettha māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Puññasaddo ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.380) puññaphale āgato. ‘‘Avijjāgatoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo puññañce saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) kāmarūpāvacarasucarite. ‘‘Puññūpagaṃ bhavati viññāṇa’’ntiādīsu sugativisesabhūte upapattibhave. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, puññakiriyavatthūni – dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthū’’tiādīsu (itivu. 60; a. ni. 8.36) kusalacetanāyaṃ. Idha pana tebhūmakakusaladhamme veditabbo. Bhāyitthāti ettha duvidhaṃ bhayaṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ, sārajjabhayanti. Tattha ‘‘yepi te, bhikkhave, devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā uccesu vimānesu ciraṭṭhitikā , tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.33) āgataṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ. ‘‘Ahudeva bhayaṃ, ahu chambhitattaṃ, ahu lomahaṃso’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.318) āgataṃ sārajjabhayaṃ. Idhāpi sārajjabhayameva. Ayañhettha attho – bhikkhave, dīgharattaṃ kāyavacīsaṃyamo vattapaṭivattapūraṇaṃ ekāsanaṃ, ekaseyyaṃ, indriyadamo, dhutadhammehi cittassa niggaho, satisampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena vīriyārambhoti evamādīni yāni bhikkhunā, nirantaraṃ pavattetabbāni puññāni, tehi mā bhāyittha, mā bhayaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjittha, ekaccassa diṭṭhadhammasukhassa uparodhabhayena samparāyikanibbānasukhadāyakehi puññehi mā bhāyitthāti. Nissakke hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.
现在,为了说明不应当恐惧的理由,而说出“sukhassetaṃ”等语。其中,「乐」这个词,在“佛陀的出世是乐,世间离欲是乐”等句子中,是指乐的原因;在“摩诃梨,因为色是乐、随乐、属于乐”等句子中,是指乐的所缘;在“诸比丘,这确实难以用譬喻来形容,天界是多么地乐”等句子中,是指以乐为缘的处所;在“积聚福是乐”等句子中,是指乐的原因;在“这些法是现法乐住”等句子中,是指无恼害的禅定;在“涅槃是最上之乐”等句子中,是指涅槃;在“由于乐受的断除”等句子中,是指乐受;在“不苦不乐,寂静,被称为乐”等句子中,是指舍受;在“阿难,我或以方便说可意受、苦受二种受”等句子中,是指可意乐;在“诸福有乐果”等句子中,是指乐的果报。在这里,也应当把它视为指可意的果报。
“可意的”等词的解释:由于应当被希求、排斥不可意的,所以称为「可意的」;由于可爱乐、令心乐着、渗入,所以称为「令人染着的」;由于应当被喜爱、令满足,所以称为「可爱的」;由于应当被尊重、令心增长,所以称为「令心满足的」——应当这样来了知词义。“诸福”一词,就是“可意的、乐果”的同义语、名称:那正是乐,而被称为福——这是通过果来指代因的一种隐喻。通过这样,听到已作、已积集的福必然有它的果报后,就能使人不放逸地、恭敬地去造作诸福,在福行中激励自己,并对此生起尊重。显示巴利原文
Idāni tato abhāyitabbabhāve kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhasseta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sukhasaddo ‘‘sukho buddhānaṃ uppādo, sukhā virāgatā loke’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 194) sukhamūle āgato. ‘‘Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60) sukhārammaṇe. ‘‘Yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, na sukaraṃ akkhānena pāpuṇituṃ yāva sukhā saggā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.255) sukhapaccayaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sukho puññassa uccayo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 118) sukhahetumhi. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete dhammā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.82) abyāpajje. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 204; ma. ni. 2.215) nibbāne. ‘‘Sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 125) sukhavedanāyaṃ. ‘‘Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, sukhamicceva bhāsita’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.253; itivu. 53) upekkhāvedanāyaṃ. ‘‘Dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā pariyāyena sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.89) iṭṭhasukhe. ‘‘Sukho vipāko puññāna’’ntiādīsu (peṭako. 23) sukhavipāke. Idhāpi iṭṭhavipāke eva daṭṭhabbo. Iṭṭhassātiādīsu esitabbato aniṭṭhapaṭikkhepato ca iṭṭhassa, kamanīyato manasmiñca kamanato pavisanato kantassa, piyāyitabbato santappanato ca piyassa, mānanīyato manassa pavaḍḍhanato ca manāpassāti attho veditabbo. Yadidaṃ puññānīti ‘‘puññānī’’ti yadidaṃ vacanaṃ, etaṃ sukhassa iṭṭhassa vipākassa adhivacanaṃ nāmaṃ, sukhameva taṃ yadidaṃ puññanti phalena kāraṇassa abhedūpacāraṃ vadati. Tena katūpacitānaṃ puññānaṃ avassaṃbhāviphalaṃ sutvā appamattena sakkaccaṃ puññāni kātabbānīti puññakiriyāyaṃ niyojeti, ādarañca nesaṃ tattha uppādeti.
现在,为了让这个意义更加清楚,佛陀以自己在名为苏内德的时候,由于所作的福业而长时间体验、被不同生有间隔所覆盖的、最胜妙的福果为例,而说“我确实了知”等语。其中,「我确实了知」:我以殊胜的智慧了知,以现量觉知。「长夜」:长时间。「诸福」:布施等善法。「七年」:七个年头。「慈心」:「慈」(mettā)的意思是柔软,所以称为慈;或者存于朋友之中,或者由朋友发生这种心状态,所以称为慈。从特相等方面来看:慈以利益的行相为特相,以向有情输送利益为作用,以降伏嗔怒为现起,以见到诸有情的可意本质为足处。灭除嗔恚是它的成就,产生爱染是它的失败。具备这种慈的心,就称为有慈心。「修习已」:慈俱行的心,以心为首而说定,也就是生起并增长慈定、慈梵住。「七劫坏空」:七个大劫。以‘坏’和‘空’这两个词,也包含了坏住劫和空住劫。「此世间」:欲界世间。「正在坏灭时」:坏灭的时候。「sudaṃ」只是一个不变化词,意思是‘正在坏灭’。也读作‘saṃvattamāne sudaṃ’。「劫」:时间。用‘劫’这个词,指的是时间。当时间被耗尽时,劫也就被耗尽了。正如所说的:显示巴利原文
Idāni attanā sunettakāle katena puññakammena dīgharattaṃ paccanubhūtaṃ bhavantarapaṭicchannaṃ uḷāratamaṃ puññavipākaṃ udāharitvā tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha abhijānāmīti abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānāmi, paccakkhato bujjhāmi. Dīgharattanti cirakālaṃ. Puññānanti dānādikusaladhammānaṃ. Satta vassānīti satta saṃvaccharāni . Mettacittanti mijjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattītipi mettā. Lakkhaṇādito pana hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā, hitūpasaṃhārarasā, āghātavinayapaccupaṭṭhānā, sattānaṃ manāpabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Byāpādūpasamo etissā sampatti, sinehāsambhavo vipatti. Sā etassa atthīti mettacittaṃ. Bhāvetvāti mettāsahagataṃ cittaṃ, cittasīsena samādhi vuttoti mettāsamādhiṃ mettābrahmavihāraṃ uppādetvā ceva vaḍḍhetvā ca. Satta saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti satta mahākappe. Saṃvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭaggahaṇeneva hi saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi-vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyinopi gahitā. Imaṃ lokanti kāmalokaṃ. Saṃvaṭṭamāne sudanti saṃvaṭṭamāne. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ vinassamāneti attho. ‘‘Saṃvattamāne suda’’nti ca paṭhanti. Kappeti kāle. Kappasīsena hi kālo vutto. Kāle khīyamāne kappopi khīyateva. Yathāha –
‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā’’ti. (jā. 1.2.190);
由于说“我成极光净天”这句,应知这里的劫灭是以火劫的方式坏灭的。「成极光净天」:以在该天界结生的方式前往极光净梵天界,所以我成为极光净天。「正形成时」:即正在安立、正在生起之时。「我生于空旷的梵宫」:因为那里没有任何先前投生的有情,故称‘空旷’;那座属于初禅地的梵宫,在劫初时,我最初化生在那里,我以结生的方式往生、到达彼处。「梵天」:因比欲界有情更尊胜,因功德以种种方式增长,又因从梵住修习而生起,故称梵天。因比梵众天、梵辅天更大,故称「大梵天」。由于他战胜那些梵天而安住,所以是「阿毗浮」。不被那些梵天以任何功德所战胜,所以是「不被阿毗浮」。「确切地」:是表示决定的语气词。「见者」:具足见的人,他能见到过去、未来、现在三时;我以神通智见所应见——这是它的意思。「令余梵天之心亦随我转」:由于神足修习的力量,我使其余梵天的心也随我转动,故称「自在者」——应当这样结合起来理解。据说,当时菩萨虽已获得八等至,但为了观察这样是否能利益众生并圆满自己的波罗蜜显示巴利原文
‘‘Ābhassarūpago homī’’ti vuttattā tejosaṃvaṭṭavasenettha kappavuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ābhassarūpagoti tattha paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ upagacchāmīti ābhassarūpago homi. Vivaṭṭamāneti saṇṭhahamāne, jāyamāneti attho. Suññaṃ brahmavimānaṃ upapajjāmīti kassaci sattassa tattha nibbattassa abhāvato suññaṃ, yaṃ paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaṅkhātaṃ brahmavimānaṃ ādito nibbattaṃ, taṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena upapajjāmi upemi. Brahmāti kāmāvacarasattehi seṭṭhaṭṭhena tathā tathā brūhitaguṇatāya brahmavihārato nibbattaṭṭhena ca brahmā. Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitehi mahanto brahmāti mahābrahmā. Tato eva te abhibhavitvā ṭhitattā abhibhū. Tehi kenaci guṇena na abhibhūtoti anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dasoti dassanasīlo, so atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ dassanasamattho, abhiññāṇena passitabbaṃ passāmīti attho. Sesabrahmānaṃ iddhipādabhāvanābalena attano cittañca mama vase vattemīti vasavattī homīti yojetabbaṃ. Tadā kira bodhisatto aṭṭhasamāpattilābhīpi samāno tathā sattahitaṃ attano pāramiparipūraṇañca olokento tāsu eva dvīsu jhānabhūmīsu nikantiṃ uppādetvā mettābrahmavihāravasena aparāparaṃ saṃsari. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavassāni…pe… vasavattī’’ti.
世尊这样阐明了色界福报果报的广大之后,现在为显示欲界福报也同样如此,而说‘三十六次’等。其中,「成为帝释天」是指在三十六次中没有往生他处,连续地成为帝释天,即三十三天的天王。「成为王」等:以四种稀有事和四种摄事令世间欢喜,故称为「王」。使轮宝转动,以四种成就轮运转,并用那些轮令他人也随之运转,为利他而有威仪轮转存续,故称为「转轮王」。这里「王」是通称,「转轮王」是殊称。依法而行,故称「如法者」,意谓依公正与平等而行。只以法获得王位而成为王,故称「法王」。或者,以利他的法行成为「如法者」,以自利的法行成为「法王」。拥有四边的主权,故称「四边者」,意谓拥有以四海为界、以四洲庄严的大地的主宰者。以内在战胜忿怒等怨敌,以外部不加杖、不加刀而战胜一切国王,故称「胜者」。已使国土达到坚固恒常之状态,无人能动摇;或者国土对他已稳固,民众归附、安住于自己的职业,不动不摇,故称「地方稳固成就者」。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā rūpāvacarapuññassa vipākamahantataṃ pakāsetvā idāni kāmāvacarapuññassāpi taṃ dassento ‘‘chattiṃsakkhattu’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sakko ahosinti chattiṃsa vāre aññattha anupapajjitvā nirantaraṃ sakko devānamindo tāvatiṃsadevarājā ahosi. Rājā ahosintiādīsu catūhi acchariyadhammehi catūhi ca saṅgahavatthūhi lokaṃ rañjetīti rājā. Cakkaratanaṃ vatteti, catūhi sampatticakkehi vattati, tehi ca paraṃ vatteti, parahitāya ca iriyāpathacakkānaṃ vatto etasmiṃ atthīti cakkavattī. Rājāti cettha sāmaññaṃ, cakkavattīti visesaṃ. Dhammena caratīti dhammiko. Ñāyena samena vattatīti attho. Dhammeneva rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jātoti dhammarājā. Parahitadhammacaraṇena vā dhammiko, attahitadhammacaraṇena dhammarājā, caturantāya issaroti cāturanto, catusamuddantāya catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāya ca pathaviyā issaroti attho. Ajjhattaṃ kopādipaccatthike, bahiddhā ca sabbarājāno adaṇḍena asatthena vijesīti vijitāvī. Janapade thāvarabhāvaṃ dhuvabhāvaṃ patto, na sakkā kenaci tato cāletuṃ janapado vā tamhi thāvariyappatto anuyutto sakammanirato acalo asampavedhīti janapadatthāvariyappatto.
具足七宝,即轮宝、象宝、马宝、珠宝、女宝、居士宝、将军宝。如此即名具足七宝。诸宝之中,转轮王以轮宝征服未归顺的疆域,以象宝与马宝安乐巡行于境内,以将军宝守护国土,以其余诸宝享受受用乐。第一宝与精进力相应,最后一宝与谋略力相应,象宝、马宝、居士宝则与物力相应而极为圆满,女宝与珠宝乃是此三种力结合之果报。他以女宝与珠宝享受受用乐,以其余诸宝享受娱乐乐。当知:前三宝由无嗔善根所生之业力成就,中间二宝由无贪善根所生之业力成就,最后一宝由无痴善根所生之业力成就。此乃地方王国——亦即小王国的说法。显示巴利原文
Cakkaratanaṃ, hatthiratanaṃ, assaratanaṃ, maṇiratanaṃ, itthiratanaṃ, gahapatiratanaṃ, pariṇāyakaratananti imehi sattahi ratanehi samupetoti sattaratanasamannāgato. Tesu hi rājā cakkavatti cakkaratanena ajitaṃ jināti, hatthiassaratanehi vijite sukheneva anuvicarati, pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati, sesehi upabhogasukhamanubhavati. Paṭhamena cassa ussāhasattiyogo , pacchimena mantasattiyogo, hatthiassagahapatiratanehi pabhūsattiyogo suparipuṇṇo hoti, itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ. So itthimaṇiratanehi paribhogasukhamanubhavati, sesehi upabhogasukhaṃ. Visesato cassa purimāni tīṇi adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti, majjhimāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena, pacchimamekaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti veditabbaṃ padesarajjassāti khuddakarajjassa.
「他生起这样的念头」:于最后转轮王时,当他观察自身成就,便生起如此念头:‘我此业究竟带来何等果报?’等等。实际上,在他每一期生命中,无论生于何处,此念皆曾生起。然此处乃是配合转轮王时节而作解说。所谓「具大威力者」:由于他拥有以珠宝、象宝等为首的宝库、坐骑等成就,以及令国土安固的成就,故具如此大威力。而「具大神力者」:则因具足轮宝等,能不压迫任何人而令诸王恭敬受其教令,并能飞行虚空等,故有如此大神力。「施」:即布施食物等所应施之物。「调御」:既指调御眼等诸根,亦指依修定而调伏贪等烦恼。「自制」:指身业、语业上的自我节制。其中,依修定调伏烦恼,属于修习所成之福,且特指以慈心为内容的梵住。此慈梵住修习又分为近行定与安止定二种:若达安止定,则依之投生于前述两种禅那境地;其余三种福行,则随其相应程度,成就转轮王等身份。应如是解。显示巴利原文
Etadahosīti attano sampattiyo paccavekkhantassa pacchime cakkavattikāle etaṃ ‘‘kissa nu kho me idaṃ kammassa phala’’ntiādikaṃ ahosi. Sabbatthakameva tasmiṃ tasmimpi bhave etadahosiyeva. Tatthāyaṃ cakkavattikālavasena yojanā. Evaṃmahiddhikoti maṇiratanahatthiratanādippamukhāya kosavāhanasampattiyā janapadatthāvariyappattiyā ca evaṃmahiddhiko. Evaṃmahānubhāvoti cakkaratanādisamannāgamena kassacipi pīḷaṃ akarontova sabbarājūhi sirasā sampaṭicchitasāsanavehāsagamanādīhi evaṃ mahānubhāvo. Dānassāti annādideyyadhammapariccāgassa. Damassāti cakkhādiindriyadamanassa ceva samādhānavasena rāgādikilesadamanassa ca. Saṃyamassāti kāyavacīsaṃyamassa. Tattha yaṃ samādhānavasena kilesadamanaṃ, taṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññaṃ , tañca kho mettābrahmavihārabhūtaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Tasmiñca upacārappanābhedena duvidhe yaṃ appanāppattaṃ, tenassa yathāvuttāsu dvīsu jhānabhūmīsu upapatti ahosi. Itarena tividhenāpi yathārahaṃ pattacakkavattiādibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
如是,世尊以自身为身证,阐明诸福果报之广大后,今为以偈颂显示此义,而开示‘正是福……’等语。其中,「他应学正是福」:任何希求自义的善男子,对于因能生福果、令自相续增长而得名‘福’的三种善法,即应修学、确立、积集、增长。「未来最上」:因能带来广大、殊胜的果报,故称‘未来最上’;或因能带来可爱、可意的果报,于未来果报中最为最上,故称‘未来最上’;又或因能生之因——如理作意等——殊胜,其果亦最上,故称‘未来最上’。此处‘t’为连音字。或说,以福所生之果最为殊胜、第一,故名‘未来最上’。正因如此,乃说「带来乐果」,即能带来快乐果报之义。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā attānaṃ kāyasakkhi katvā puññānaṃ vipākamahantataṃ pakāsetvā idāni tamevatthaṃ gāthābandhena dassento ‘‘puññamevā’’tiādimāha. Tattha puññameva so sikkheyyāti yo atthakāmo kulaputto, so puññaphalanibbattanato, attano santānaṃ punanato ca ‘‘puñña’’nti laddhanāmaṃ tividhaṃ kusalameva sikkheyya niveseyya upacineyya pasaveyyāti attho. Āyatagganti vipulaphalatāya uḷāraphalatāya āyataggaṃ, piyamanāpaphalatāya vā āyatiṃ uttamanti āyataggaṃ, āyena vā yonisomanasikārādippaccayena uḷāratamena agganti āyataggaṃ . Takāro padasandhikaro. Atha vā āyena puññaphalena aggaṃ padhānanti āyataggaṃ. Tato eva sukhudrayaṃ sukhavipākanti attho.
那么,什么是那种福?又应当如何学它呢?经文答道:「应修习施与正行,以及慈心。」其中,「正行」是指远离身体的不正行等,践行身体的正行,也就是极清净的戒。「应修习」意为令其在自身相续中生起并增长。「这些法」即指布施等这些善行之法。「为乐之源」是说它们能带来乐的义利,此处显示这些福的果报唯是乐。「无恼的乐之世间」:由于远离了爱欲等敌对心理与损害,那种世间是「无恼害」「无苦」的;至于毫无众生的逼恼,更不待言。同时,依禅那等至而拥有众多快乐,故称「乐」。由禅那之福所引生的梵天界是纯然的乐;而以其他福所招感的种种成就与存在状态,则称为乐之世间。智者、具慧者会往生、到达那里。如此,在这篇经文与偈颂中所说明的,正是轮回中的殊胜成就。显示巴利原文
Katamaṃ pana taṃ puññaṃ, kathañca naṃ sikkheyyāti āha ‘‘dānañca samacariyañca, mettacittañca bhāvaye’’ti. Tattha samacariyanti kāyavisamādīni vajjetvā kāyasamādicaritaṃ , suvisuddhaṃ sīlanti attho. Bhāvayeti attano santāne uppādeyya vaḍḍheyya. Ete dhammeti ete dānādike sucaritadhamme. Sukhasamuddayeti sukhānisaṃse, ānisaṃsaphalampi nesaṃ sukhamevāti dasseti. Abyāpajjaṃ sukhaṃ lokanti kāmacchandādibyāpādavirahitattā abyāpajjaṃ niddukkhaṃ, parapīḷābhāve pana vattabbaṃ natthi. Jhānasamāpattivasena sukhabahulattā sukhaṃ, ekantasukhañca brahmalokaṃ jhānapuññānaṃ, itarapuññānaṃ pana tadaññaṃ sampattibhavasaṅkhātaṃ sukhaṃ lokaṃ paṇḍito sappañño upapajjati upeti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte gāthāsu ca vaṭṭasampatti eva kathitā.
第三经:自他两利经的注释显示巴利原文
3. Ubhayatthasuttavaṇṇanā
23 第三经中,「已修习」意为已令生起且已增长。「已多作」意为反复多次而作。「义利」即利益。因为它是人们所应希求、应去接近证得的,所以称为「义利」。「正持而住」是指正确地把握之后,不舍弃而安住。「现法义利」:此处所说的「现法」是指现前可见的自身;属于现法、存在于此世的,就是「现法义利」,也就是涵摄于此世的生命中的义利。「后世义利」:所谓「后世」,是由于法而应继续流转至他方,亦即他世;属于后世、存在于他世的,就是「后世义利」,也就是涵摄于未来生命中的义利。显示巴利原文
23. Tatiye bhāvitoti uppādito ca vaḍḍhito ca. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Atthoti hitaṃ. Tañhi araṇīyato upagantabbato atthoti vuccati. Samadhigayha tiṭṭhatīti sammā pariggahetvā avijahitvā vattati. Diṭṭhadhammikanti diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkhabhūto attabhāvo, diṭṭhadhamme bhavaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ, idhalokapariyāpannanti attho. Samparāyikanti dhammavasena samparetabbato samparāyo, paraloko, samparāye bhavaṃ samparāyikaṃ, paralokapariyāpannanti vuttaṃ hoti.
然而,什么是现法义利,什么又是后世义利呢?简而言之:凡是此世的安乐,以及当前能带来此世安乐的事物,就是现法义利。例如:在家者于此生中,种种能满足生活所需的财物与工具、平顺无扰乱的事业、健康的妥善维护,以及从事清洁住所、营办种种技艺处与明处、妥善照顾家人眷属等,都属于这一类。对于出家者,则是那些活命资具,也就是衣、团食、坐卧具、病缘药资具。能够不太困难地获得这些资具;获得之后,能带着思量、如理省察地去受用它们,知道什么应回避;保持住所清洁;少欲;知足;乐于独处;不杂处闲聊等。而像住在适宜的地方、亲近依止善士、听闻正法、如理作意等,则是两类人共通、并且对两类人都适宜的利益,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Ko panesa diṭṭhadhammiko nāma attho, ko vā samparāyikoti? Saṅkhepena tāva yaṃ idhalokasukhaṃ, yañcetarahi idhalokasukhāvahaṃ, ayaṃ diṭṭhadhammiko attho. Seyyathidaṃ – gahaṭṭhānaṃ tāva idha yaṃ kiñci vittūpakaraṇaṃ, anākulakammantatā, ārogyasaṃvidhānaṃ, vatthuvisadakiriyāyogavihitāni sippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānāni saṅgahitaparijanatāti evamādi. Pabbajitānaṃ pana ye ime jīvitaparikkhārā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā. Tesaṃ akicchalābho, tattha ca saṅkhāya paṭisevanā , saṅkhāya parivajjanā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, appicchatā, santuṭṭhi, paviveko, asaṃsaggoti evamādi. Patirūpadesavāsasappurisūpanissayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikārādayo pana ubhayesaṃ sādhāraṇā ubhayānurūpā cāti veditabbā.
「不放逸」:此处所说的「不放逸」,应理解为与「放逸」相反的状态。那么,什么是「放逸」呢?就是处于放逸的行为状态。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Appamādoti ettha appamādo pamādappaṭipakkhato veditabbo. Ko panesa pamādo nāma? Pamajjanākāro. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
那么,什么是「放逸」呢?对于身恶行、语恶行、意恶行,或对于五种欲乐,心的放纵与放纵的生起;或者,对于善法的修习,不恭敬、不持续、不稳固地修习,懈怠沉滞,舍弃欲求,舍弃责任,不亲近、不修习、不广修——此即放逸。(《分别论》846)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo pamādo? Kāyaduccarite vā vacīduccarite vā manoduccarite vā pañcasu vā kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo vossaggānuppādanaṃ kusalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asakkaccakiriyatā asātaccakiriyatā anaṭṭhitakiriyatā olīnavuttitā nikkhittachandatā nikkhittadhuratā anāsevanā abhāvanā abahulīkammaṃ anadhiṭṭhānaṃ ananuyogopamādo. Yo evarūpo pamādo pamajjanā pamajjitattaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati pamādo’’ti (vibha. 846).
因此,应从上述相反面来了解「不放逸」。就含义而言,它即是不远离念,恒常安住于正念者才得此名。另有人则说:「以念与正知相应而生起的四个无色蕴,即是不放逸。」显示巴利原文
Tasmā vuttappaṭipakkhato appamādo veditabbo. Atthato hi so satiyā avippavāso, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘satisampajaññayogena pavattā cattāro arūpino khandhā appamādo’’ti vadanti.
既说“已修习、已多修习”,那么这“不放逸”应当如何修习呢?其实,并没有一种单独的、名为“不放逸修习”的修习。一切福德业、善法业,都应当视为不放逸的修习。特别是,依止于以出离为助缘的皈依,以及身、语的防护,应当了知:一切戒的修习、定的修习、慧的修习、一切善法的修习,无不是无过失的修习,亦即不放逸的修习。因为“不放逸”一词阐明、含摄了广大的意义。即便把全部的巴利三藏佛语拿来,解释“不放逸”一词的意义而说法,这位说法者也不应被说成“在不该涉入的地方涉入”。为什么呢?因为“不放逸”一词意义广大。正如正自觉者在拘尸那罗的双娑罗树间,将要般涅槃卧下时,把从成正觉以来四十五年间所说的法,以一词统摄而开示:“要以不放逸而成就!”以此教诫比丘们。又如这样说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhāvito bahūlīkato’’ti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ panāyaṃ appamādo bhāvetabboti? Na appamādabhāvanā nāma visuṃ ekabhāvanā atthi. Yā hi kāci puññakiriyā kusalakiriyā, sabbā sā appamādabhāvanātveva veditabbā. Visesato pana vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ kāyikavācasikasaṃvarañca upādāya sabbā sīlabhāvanā, sabbā samādhibhāvanā, sabbā paññābhāvanā, sabbā kusalabhāvanā, anavajjabhāvanā, appamādabhāvanāti veditabbā. ‘‘Appamādo’’ti hi idaṃ mahantaṃ atthaṃ dīpeti, mahantaṃ atthaṃ pariggahetvā tiṭṭhati. Sakalampi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āharitvā appamādapadassa atthaṃ katvā kathento dhammakathiko ‘‘atitthena pakkhando’’ti na vattabbo. Kasmā? Appamādapadassa mahantabhāvato. Tathā hi sammāsambuddho kusinārāyaṃ yamakasālānamantare parinibbānasamaye nipanno abhisambodhito paṭṭhāya pañcacattālīsāya vassesu attanā bhāsitaṃ dhammaṃ ekena padena saṅgahetvā dassento – ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ ovādamadāsi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
“诸比丘,犹如一切陆生动物的足迹,都包含于大象的足迹之中,大象的足迹以其广大,于诸足迹中被称为最上;同样地,诸比丘,所有善法皆以不放逸为根本、以不放逸为归宿,不放逸于这些善法中,被称为最上。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave , yāni kānici jaṅgalānaṃ pāṇānaṃ padajātāni, sabbāni tāni hatthipade samodhānaṃ gacchanti, hatthipadaṃ tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati yadidaṃ mahantaṭṭhena; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbete appamādamūlakā appamādasamosaraṇā, appamādo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.300).
于偈颂中,“赞叹不放逸”是说:智者——即具慧者、佛陀等——于布施等福德业中,赞叹、称扬、褒扬不放逸。何以故?因为不放逸的智者能获得两种义利。哪两种?即“现世的义利,以及后世的义利”,文句的连接应如此理解。其中,“现世的义利”:对在家人而言,即如“无过失的业、不混乱的业”等所说,依守牛等方法所能获得的利益;对于出家人,应知是指无悔等利益。而“后世的义利”,当知即为二者所说的法行。“义利成就”:即获得此两种义利,与应得的利益相会合、结合、契合,这称为“时机”,即获得;时机即是成就;或者,就现前之状而言,时机即是成就——此处的成就应如此理解。“慧者”是因具足慧而得名。此外,这里第三个“义”字亦含摄了以涅槃为究竟义。其余则容易了知。这样,于此经中仅宣说了流转的成就,但于偈颂中,也应见有还灭的含摄。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti dānādipuññakiriyāsu appamādaṃ appamajjanaṃ paṇḍitā sappaññā buddhādayo pasaṃsanti, vaṇṇenti thomenti. Kasmā? Yasmā appamatto ubho atthe adhigaṇhāti paṇḍito. Ke pana te ubho atthāti āha – ‘‘diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko’’ti, evamettha padayojanā veditabbā. Idhāpi diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo atthoti gahaṭṭhassa tāva ‘‘anavajjāni kammāni, anākulā ca kammantā’’tiādinā nayena vutto kasigorakkhādividhinā laddhabbo attho, pabbajitassa pana avippaṭisārādiattho veditabbo. Yo cattho samparāyikoti pana ubhayesampi dhammacariyāva vuttāti veditabbā. Atthābhisamayāti duvidhassapi atthassa hitassa paṭilābhā, laddhabbena samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, lābho. Samayo eva abhisamayo, abhimukhabhāvena vā samayo abhisamayoti evamettha abhisamayo veditabbo. Dhitisampannattā dhīro. Tatiyena cettha attha-saddena paramatthassa nibbānassāpi saṅgaho veditabbo. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭasampatti eva kathitā. Gāthāyaṃ pana vivaṭṭassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
如此殊胜地了知之后,智者于不放逸……
他们于不放逸中生起喜悦,乐行于圣者的行境。
他们是禅修者,持续精勤,恒常坚固而精进;
智者触及涅槃——那无上的、离一切轭的安稳。”(《法句经》21-23)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Appamādo amatapadaṃ, pamādo maccuno padaṃ; Appamattā na mīyanti, ye pamattā yathā matā. ‘‘Evaṃ visesato ñatvā, appamādamhi paṇḍitā; Appamāde pamodanti, ariyānaṃ gocare ratā. ‘‘Te jhāyino sātatikā, niccaṃ daḷhaparakkamā; Phusanti dhīrā nibbānaṃ, yogakkhemaṃ anuttara’’nti. (dha. pa. 21-23);
因此,在“以义现观”一语中,此“义”也应当依出世间义来理解。显示巴利原文
Tasmā ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’ti ettha lokuttaratthavasenapi attho veditabbo.
第四 骨堆经注疏显示巴利原文
4. Aṭṭhipuñjasuttavaṇṇanā
24 在第四经中,“一人”之说——这里的“补特伽罗”乃是世俗施设的言说。因为佛陀、世尊的教导有两种:世俗谛的教导和胜义谛的教导。其中,“补特伽罗、有情、女人、男人、刹帝利、婆罗门、天、魔”等类,属于世俗谛的教导;“无常、苦、无我、蕴、界、处、念处”等类,属于胜义谛的教导。在这些教导中,世尊对于那些凭借世俗言教听闻便能证得殊胜义的人,便以世俗谛为之说法;对于那些唯有凭借胜义言教听闻方能证得殊胜义的人,便以胜义谛为之说法。显示巴利原文
24. Catutthe ekapuggalassāti ettha puggaloti ayaṃ vohārakathā. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā ca paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha ‘‘puggalo, satto, itthī, puriso, khattiyo, brāhmaṇo, devo, māro’’ti evarūpā sammutidesanā. ‘‘Aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, anattā, khandhā, dhātu, āyatanā, satipaṭṭhānā’’ti evarūpā paramatthadesanā. Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, nesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti.
于此有一譬喻:譬如一位精通各地方言、善于讲解三吠陀义理的老师,对能听懂达罗毗荼语所说义理的人,便用达罗毗荼语为之讲解;对能听懂安陀迦语等其他某一种语言的人,便用相应的语言为之讲解。如此,那些年轻人依止这位善巧明通的老师,便能迅速掌握技艺。在这一譬喻中,老师犹如佛陀、世尊;三吠陀犹如应解说的三藏;精通方言犹如善于运用世俗与胜义之教;说不同方言的年轻人,犹如堪以世俗或胜义方式证悟的应受教者;老师用达罗毗荼语等讲解,即如世尊依世俗或胜义而说法。关于这一点,他说:显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati. Ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya tāya bhāsāya. Evaṃ te māṇavakā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā, tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāve ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni, desabhāsākosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ, nānādesabhāsā māṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthavasena paṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyā, ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasena desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
正自觉者——诸言说者中的最上者,宣说了两种谛理:
世俗谛与胜义谛;并不存在第三种谛理。
依世间共许之因,随顺言说的言语为真实;
说究竟义的语言是真实的,因为它如实表达了诸法的真实因由。
因此,对于那位善巧于世间言说的世间怙主、导师,
随顺世间共许而说法者,便不会有妄语生起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. ‘‘Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. ‘‘Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti.
此外,世尊依八种理由宣说有关补特伽罗的言教:为阐明惭与愧,为阐明业的自作性,为阐明个人努力的作用,为阐明无间业,为阐明梵住,为阐明宿住,为阐明布施的清净,以及为不舍弃世间的共许。若说“诸蕴、界、处有惭有愧”,大众便不能了解,会陷入迷乱,或心生敌对,想:“这些所谓有惭有愧的蕴、界、处,究竟是什么?”然而,若说“女人有惭有愧,男子、刹帝利、婆罗门、天、魔有惭有愧”,他们便能了解,不陷迷乱,也不生敌对。因此,世尊为阐明惭与愧,而宣说关于补特伽罗的言教。显示巴利原文
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ, paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ, , ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ, brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ, pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ, dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ, lokasammutiyā appahānatthaṃ, cāti. ‘‘Khandhadhātuāyatanāni hiriyanti ottappantī’’ti hi vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti – ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni hiriyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Itthī hiriyati ottappati, puriso, khattiyo, brāhmaṇo, devo, māro’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu vā hoti. Tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“诸蕴是业的所有者,诸界、诸处是业的所有者”,道理也是如此。因此,为阐明业的自作性等意义,世尊宣说关于补特伽罗的言教。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā kammassakā, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā kammassakatādīpanatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“竹林精舍等大精舍是由诸蕴所建造,由诸界、诸处所建造”,道理也是如此。同样,若说“诸蕴夺取母命、夺取父命、夺取阿拉汉命,造作出佛身血业、破僧伽业,而诸界、诸处亦如此”,道理也是如此。若说“诸蕴修习慈心,诸界、诸处修习”,亦复如是。若说“诸蕴回忆宿住,诸界、诸处回忆”,也同样。因此,世尊为阐明个人努力的作用,为阐明无间业,为阐明梵住,也为阐明宿住,而开示关于补特伽罗的言教。显示巴利原文
‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā, dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tathā ‘‘khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti, pitaraṃ, arahantaṃ, ruhiruppādakammaṃ, saṅghabhedakammaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ pubbenivāsadīpanatthañca puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“诸蕴接受布施,诸界、诸处接受布施”,大众大多不能了知,便会陷入迷乱,或成为对立者,心中起念:“所谓‘诸蕴、诸界、诸处接受布施’,这到底是什么意思呢?”然而若说“补特伽罗们接受”,大众便能了知,不陷入迷乱,也不成为对立者。因此,世尊为了阐明布施的清净,而宣说关于补特伽罗的言论。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu vā hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
而且,诸佛世尊不舍弃世间共许,依循世间共名、世间言语、世间称谓而安立说法。因此,世尊为了不舍弃世间共许,也讲述了补特伽罗的道理。他在这里,为了显示应随顺世间共许而说的义理,便说了“于一补特伽罗”等。显示巴利原文
Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto na pajahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti. So idhāpi lokavohāravasena desetabbamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ekapuggalassā’’tiādimāha.
其中,「于一补特伽罗」即指一个有情。「劫」指大劫。虽然此处在绝对相续的意义上用的是受格,但应依有情在其中流转、轮回的那(一劫)来理解。「骨聚」指骨的部分。也有人读作「骨堆」,意思就是骨的积聚。「骨堆」即骨的集合。「骨山」是它的同义词。然而有些人说:‘从腰量以下(的积聚)名为“骨聚”,从腰以上至掌量名为“骨堆”,再往上名为“骨山”。’那只是他们自己的见解。所有这些都只是表示骨集合的同义词,因为它们都是作为‘广大’(Vepulla)的譬喻而举出的。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekapuggalassāti ekasattassa. Kappanti mahākappaṃ. Yadipi accantasaṃyoge idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, yattha pana sattānaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ sambhavati, tassa vasena gahetabbaṃ. Aṭṭhikaṅkaloti aṭṭhibhāgo. ‘‘Aṭṭhikhalo’’tipi paṭhanti, aṭṭhisañcayoti attho. Aṭṭhipuñjoti aṭṭhisamūho. Aṭṭhirāsīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kaṭippamāṇato heṭṭhā samūho kaṅkalo nāma, tato upari yāva tālappamāṇaṃ puñjo, tato upari rāsī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Sabbametaṃ samūhasseva pariyāyavacanaṃ vepullasseva upamābhāvena āhaṭattā.
「若有收集者」是依假设而说:若有某人能不散乱地收集骨头并存放好。「所收集的也不消失」同样是依假设而说:这样由某人收集起来的骨骸,若未因消失而腐烂、化为微尘——也就是说,假设它不会消失。此处义为:比丘们,有情因业与烦恼辗转相续而不断受生,在轮回流转一大劫的时间里,其骨骸的累积如此巨大,等同于这座广大的Vepulla山之长、宽、高。然而,这仅是假设有一位能收集存放的人,且所收集之物不消失。这一教说排除了如同熄灭的灯火般、具有坏灭性质、不留下遗骸的化生有情,以及全无骨头的微细身躯之后而说。有人说:‘此理既以假设引出,那么即便是化生等有情,若其有骨聚,这一骨堆之量亦可适用。’另有人说:‘并非如此。这是针对实际能形成骨堆的有情,由一切知智所判定的数量而宣说。因此,应依已说之义而解。’显示巴利原文
Sace saṃhārako assāti avippakiraṇavasena saṃharitvā ṭhapetā koci yadi siyāti parikappanavasena vadati. Sambhatañca na vinasseyyāti tathā kenaci sambhatañca taṃ aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ antaradhānābhāvena pūtibhūtaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇañca ahutvā sace na vinasseyyāti parikappanavaseneva vadati. Ayañhettha attho – bhikkhave, ekassa sattassa kammakilesehi aparāparuppattivasena ekaṃ mahākappaṃ sandhāvantassa saṃsarantassa evaṃ mahāaṭṭhisañcayo bhaveyya, ārohapariṇāhehi yattakoyaṃ vepullapabbato. Sace panassa koci saṃharitvā ṭhapetā bhaveyya, sambhatañca taṃ sace avinassantaṃ tiṭṭheyyāti. Ayañca nayo nibbutappadīpe viya bhijjanasabhāve kaḷevaranikkheparahite opapātikattabhāve sabbena sabbaṃ anaṭṭhike ca khuddakattabhāve vajjetvā vutto. Keci pana ‘‘parikappanavasena imassa nayassa āhaṭattā tesampi yadi siyā aṭṭhikaṅkalo, tenāpi saheva ayaṃ aṭṭhipuñjaparimāṇo vutto’’ti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘nayidamevaṃ labbhamānasseva aṭṭhipuñjassa vasena sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā imassa parimāṇassa vuttatā. Tasmā vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo’’ti.
在偈颂中,「大仙」:因寻求伟大的戒蕴等,故称大仙,即正自觉者。而「如是,大仙所说」一句,是世尊如同在‘比丘们,如来成就十力’等教示中那样,将自己示现为他人一般来显示。「广大的」(Vepulla):指环绕王舍城五座山之一,因山体广大而得名Vepulla,即‘大’之意。就方位而言,此山位于灵鹫峰之北。「于山城」:指位于名为山城的王舍城附近。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu mahesināti mahante sīlakkhandhādayo esati gavesatīti mahesī, sammāsambuddho. ‘‘Iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’ti ca bhagavā ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato, bhikkhave, tathāgato’’tiādīsu viya attānaṃ aññaṃ viya katvā dasseti. Vepulloti rājagahaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitesu pañcasu pabbatesu vipulabhāvato vepulloti laddhanāmo. Tato eva mahā, ṭhitadisābhāgavasena uttaro gijjhakūṭassa. Giribbajeti giribbajapuranāmakassa rājagahassa samīpe.
至此,世尊通过‘即便在此期间,未断有根、未了知事相的凡夫,也会有如此的积集增长’这番话,显示了轮回的过患。现在,为表明:正是由于不通晓、不证悟圣谛,无闻凡夫才会如此积集增长;而对于已彻见圣谛的圣者,此事并不存在,于是世尊宣说了‘然而,当以正慧彻见圣谛时’等偈颂。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhagavā ‘‘ettakenāpi kālena anupacchinnabhavamūlassa apariññātavatthukassa puthujjanassa ayamīdisī kaṭasivaḍḍhanā’’ti vaṭṭe ādīnavaṃ dassetvā idāni yesaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā andhaputhujjanassa evaṃ kaṭasivaḍḍhanā, tāni ariyasaccāni diṭṭhavato ariyapuggalassa ayaṃ natthīti dassento ‘‘yato ca ariyasaccānī’’tiādimāha.
此处,“yato”意为“当……时”。“圣谛”:其中“圣”是因应被了知而得名;“谛”则因其有真实不虚的本质,故合称“圣谛”。或者,能令成为圣者的谛,即是圣谛。或者,应被佛陀等圣者们所证悟的谛,即是圣谛。或者,属于圣者的谛,即是圣谛。再者,因与诸天等一切世间同所皈依、应被了知的圣者即是世尊,而由此世尊以自生智所彻见,故属于他的谛,称为圣谛。“以正慧彻见”:指以伴随观慧的道慧,通过遍知、断除、作证、修习等证入方式,以正因、正途来彻见。“苦”等词,是显示圣谛的自身性相。其中,因具有众多灾患的所依处,故是低劣的;又因缺乏凡夫所妄想执着的常、净、乐、我,故是空无的;由此称为“苦”。苦由此而生起,故是“苦之生起”,即“苦集”。以此作为所缘缘,或在此中超越苦,即是“苦之超越”,亦即涅槃。因远离烦恼且应被了知,故称为“圣”。以正见等八种支分为体,故是“八支”,在杀灭烦恼的意义上而行。显示巴利原文
Tattha yatoti yadā. Ariyasaccānīti araṇīyato ariyāni, avitathabhāvena saccāni cāti ariyasaccāni, ariyabhāvakarāni vā saccāni ariyasaccāni, ariyehi vā buddhādīhi paṭivijjhitabbāni saccāni ariyasaccāni. Atha vā ariyassa saccāni ariyasaccāni. Sadevakena hi lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato ariyo bhagavā, tena sayambhuñāṇena diṭṭhattā tassa saccānīti ariyasaccāni. Sammappaññāya passatīti sammā hetunā ñāyena vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena passati. Dukkhantiādi ariyasaccānaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Tattha anekūpaddavādhiṭṭhānatāya kucchitabhāvato bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattavirahena tucchabhāvato ca dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ samuppajjati etenāti dukkhasamuppādo, dukkhasamudayo. Dukkhaṃ atikkamati etena ārammaṇappaccayabhūtena, ettha vāti dukkhassa atikkamo, nibbānaṃ. Ārakattā kilesehi araṇīyato ca ariyo. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgiko. Mārento kilese gacchati, nibbānatthikehi maggīyati, sayaṃ vā nibbānaṃ maggatīti maggo. Tato eva dukkhassa upasamaṃ nirodhaṃ gacchatīti dukkhūpasamagāmī. Yato sammappaññāya passatīti sambandho.
“那位补特伽罗,流转之后,以七次为最多”:那位如是彻见四谛的圣者补特伽罗,即是入流者,于一切根性中最为迟钝,他在诸有中一期一期地受生,流转、轮回,最多仅有七次。由于根性有锐利、中等、迟钝的差别,入流者有三种:一种子者、家家者、七返有者。其中,针对根性最迟钝者而说此语:“他流转之后,以七次为最多。”“成为苦的终结者”:即成为轮回之苦的终结者、使之完全灭尽。如何成就?通过渐次证得最上道,断尽一切结,舍离所有无余的结,因此,本经开示最终以阿拉汉果为顶点。显示巴利原文
Sasattakkhattuṃ paramaṃ, sandhāvitvāna puggaloti so evaṃ catusaccadassāvī ariyapuggalo sotāpanno sabbamudindriyo samāno sattavāraparamaṃyeva bhavādīsu aparāparuppattivasena sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā. Ekabījī, kolaṃkolo, sattakkhattuparamoti indriyānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena tayo hi sotāpannā. Tesu sabbamudindriyassa vasenidaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sa sattakkhattuṃ paramaṃ, sandhāvitvānā’’ti . Dukkhassantakaro hotīti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaro pariyosānakaro hoti. Kathaṃ? Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayā anupubbena aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā niravasesānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khepanāti arahattaphaleneva desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi.
第五 妄语经注释显示巴利原文
5. Musāvādasuttavaṇṇanā
25 当时,世尊和比丘僧团获得了极大的利养与恭敬,外道们的利养与恭敬却衰落了。他们利养恭敬受损,变得黯淡无光、失势无力,心生嫉妒,便唆使一位名叫旃遮摩那吠卡的女游行外道说:“来吧,贤妹,你以不实之言去诽谤沙门乔达摩。”于是她趁着世尊在四众弟子中说法时,走上前去,作了不实的诽谤。当帝释天揭破她的虚妄时,大众骂着“呸,倒霉女人!”把她从寺院驱逐出去;大地裂开,她直接成了无间地狱火焰的燃料,投生到无间地狱。外道们的利养与恭敬便愈加衰落了。比丘们在法堂中议论起来:“贤友们,旃遮摩那吠卡竟然如此诽谤具有广大功德的最上应供者、正自觉者,遭致了大毁灭啊!”导师到来后问道:“诸比丘,你们现在聚集在一起谈论什么?”比丘们回答:“在谈论此事。”世尊说:“诸比丘,非仅现在,过去世时,她亦曾以不实之言诽谤于我,并遭受了大毁灭。”随后世尊详细讲述了《大莲花本生经》,接着在说法中,以此事为因缘,开示了这部“一法已过”的经。显示巴利原文
25. Pañcame ekadhammaṃ atītassāti kā uppatti? Bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca mahālābhasakkāro uppajji, titthiyānaṃ parihāyi. Te hatalābhasakkārā nippabhā nittejā issāpakatā ciñcamāṇavikaṃ nāma paribbājikaṃ uyyojesuṃ – ‘‘ehi, tvaṃ bhagini, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ abhūtena abbhācikkhassū’’ti. Sā bhagavantaṃ catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ desentaṃ upagantvā abhūtena abbhācikkhitvā sakkenassā abhūtabhāve pakāsite mahājanena ‘‘dhī kāḷakaṇṇī’’ti vihārato nikkaḍḍhāpitā pathaviyā vivare dinne avīcijālānaṃ indhanaṃ hutvāva avīciniraye nibbatti, bhiyyosomattāya titthiyānaṃ lābhasakkāro parihāyi. Bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, ciñcamāṇavikā evaṃ uḷāraguṇaṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ abhūtena akkositvā mahāvināsaṃ pattā’’ti. Satthā āgantvā ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘imāya nāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘na, bhikkhave, idāneva, pubbepi sā maṃ abhūtena akkositvā mahāvināsaṃ pattāyevā’’ti mahāpadumajātakampi vitthāretvā upari dhammaṃ desento imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā ‘‘ekadhammaṃ atītassā’’ti idaṃ suttaṃ desesi.
在这里,「一法」:指一种法,即名为“语真实”的法。「已过」:对于越过了那条界限而安住的人而言。这条界限是圣者们为使众生舍弃八种非圣语、安住于八种圣语而设立的:“应言真实,勿言虚妄。”所谓“人”即是指补特伽罗。对他而言,「没有不能做的」:意思是没有什么做不出来的。因为一个故意妄语的人,造作恶业后,当被问及“此事是你做的吗?”时,只会用妄语搪塞:“不是我做的。”如此行事,则一切恶业无有不做,且对此毫无羞惭,因为他已逾越了真实的界限。因此世尊说:“是哪一法呢?诸比丘,即是故意妄语。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ekadhammanti ekaṃ vacīsaccasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ. Atītassāti yā sā aṭṭha anariyavohāre vajjetvā aṭṭhasu ariyavohāresu patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ‘‘saccaṃ , bhaṇe, nālika’’nti ariyehi ṭhapitā mariyādā, taṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitassa. Puriso eva puggaloti purisapuggalo, tassa. Akaraṇīyanti kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sampajānamusāvādī hi puggalo kiñci pāpakammaṃ katvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma tayā kata’’nti vutte ‘‘na mayā kata’’nti musāvādeneva pariharissati. Evañca paṭipajjanto kiñci pāpakammaṃ karotiyeva, na tattha lajjati saccamariyādāya samatikkantattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ, yadidaṃ, bhikkhave, sampajānamusāvādo’’ti.
在偈颂中,「妄语者」:指习惯于以虚假、不实、不正确的言语去蒙骗他人的人。对于那种在十句话中连一句真实都没有的人,实在没有可与之交谈之处。「众生」:即有情。因为有情会生于诸趣,故称“众生”。「已超越他世者」:即已舍弃来世之人。像这样的人,于人成就、天成就及最上涅槃成就这三种成就皆视而不见。对那种人而言,「没有恶」:即不存在“这种恶业是不应做的”这样的观念。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ musāvādissāti musā abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ paresaṃ viññāpanavasena vadanasīlassa. Yassa dasasu vacanesu ekampi saccaṃ natthi, evarūpe vattabbameva natthi. Jantunoti sattassa. Satto hi jāyanaṭṭhena ‘‘jantū’’ti vuccati. Vitiṇṇaparalokassāti vissaṭṭhaparalokassa. Īdiso hi manussasampatti devalokasampatti avasāne nibbānasampattīti imā tissopi sampattiyo na passati. Natthi pāpanti tassa tādisassa idaṃ nāma pāpaṃ na kattabbanti natthīti.
第六 布施经注释显示巴利原文
6. Dānasuttavaṇṇanā
26 第六经中,“如果这样”:此处「evaṃ」是表示譬喻义的介词,而「ceti」表示假设。「有情」:即于色等诸蕴中执着、黏着的众生。“了知”:即觉悟。「布施与分享」:即由某种思心所,将食物等应施之物聚集起来,出于悲悯或供养等某一动机而施予他人,这称为“布施”;而将自己本应受用的物品中,取出一部分分配给别人,则称为“分享”。“异熟”:即果报。「如同我所了知」:即如我世尊所了知的那样。这意思是:诸位比丘,就如我以智慧之力现量了知布施与分享的业异熟,例如,“对畜生道的有情行布施,可得百倍果报”,如此类推;如果这些有情也能同样了知。「不施与他人,不应自己受用」:即不应以悭吝之心和渴爱贪欲,对自己所拥有、本应受用的物品,不施予其他众生而独自享用;应当先布施,然后才受用。“而且,愿他们的心不”显示巴利原文
26. Chaṭṭhe evañceti ettha evanti upamākāre nipāto, ceti parikappane. Sattāti rūpādīsu sattā visattā. Jāneyyunti bujjheyyuṃ. Dānasaṃvibhāgassāti yāya hi cetanāya annādideyyadhammaṃ saṃharitvā anukampāpūjāsu aññataravasena paresaṃ dīyati, taṃ dānaṃ. Yāya pana attanā paribhuñjitabbabhāvena gahitavatthussa ekadeso saṃvibhajitvā dīyati, ayaṃ saṃvibhāgo. Vipākanti phalaṃ. Yathāhaṃ jānāmīti yathā ahaṃ jānāmi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tiracchānagatassapi dānaṃ datvā attabhāvasate pavattasukhavipaccanavasena sataguṇā dakkhiṇā hotīti evamādinā, bhikkhave, yena pakārena ahaṃ dānassa saṃvibhāgassa ca vipākaṃ kammavipākaṃ ñāṇabalena paccakkhato jānāmi, evaṃ ime sattā yadi jāneyyunti. Na adatvā bhuñjeyyunti yaṃ bhuñjitabbayuttakaṃ attano atthi, tato paresaṃ na adatvā macchariyacittena ca taṇhālobhavasena ca bhuñjeyyuṃ, datvāva bhuñjeyyuṃ. Na ca nesaṃ maccheramalaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyyāti attano sampattīnaṃ parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanalakkhaṇaṃ cittassa pabhassarabhāvadūsakānaṃ upakkilesabhūtānaṃ kaṇhadhammānaṃ aññataraṃ maccheramalaṃ. Atha vā yathāvuttamaccherañceva aññampi dānantarāyakaraṃ issālobhadosādimalañca nesaṃ sattānaṃ cittaṃ yathā dānacetanā na pavattati, na vā suparisuddhā hoti, evaṃ pariyādāya parito gahetvā abhibhavitvā na tiṭṭheyya. Ko hi sammadeva dānaphalaṃ jānanto attano citte maccheramalassa okāsaṃ dadeyya.
“即使他们还有最后一口食物”(yopi nesaṃ assa carimo ālopo):即对于这些众生来说,那可能是最末后的一口食物。“最后一口食团”(carimaṃ kabaḷaṃ)是它的同义词。意思是:这些众生平常用若干口食维生,如果把其中唯一一口留给自己,而把其余所有食物都施予来来往往有需求的人,那么留下的这一口便叫作“最后一口食”。即使对这口食物,若不与人分享,他们也不应独自受用。“如果他们有受施者”(sace nesaṃ paṭiggāhakā assu):即如果这些众生有受施者在,即使是从刚才所说的最后一口食中,也应当先分出一部分布施出去,然后才自己食用。正如我现量了知布施与分享的异熟那样,如果他们也能这样了知该有多好。“然而因为……等”(yasmā ca kho…tiādinā):这是说由于没有现量照见业果,这些众生才不肯行布施与分享,以此阐明所言的义理。由此也应看出,这揭示了他们为何在此及其他福德中不修习,反而在非福中造作的原因。显示巴利原文
Yopi nesaṃ assa carimo ālopoti nesaṃ sattānaṃ yo sabbapacchimako ālopo siyā. Carimaṃ kabaḷanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime sattā pakatiyā yattakehi ālopehi sayaṃ yāpeyyuṃ, tesu ekameva ālopaṃ attano atthāya ṭhapetvā tadaññe sabbe ālope āgatāgatānaṃ atthikānaṃ datvā yo ṭhapito ālopo assa, so idha carimo ālopo nāma. Tatopi na asaṃvibhajitvā bhuñjeyyuṃ, sace nesaṃ paṭiggāhakā assūti nesaṃ sattānaṃ paṭiggāhakā yadi siyuṃ, tatopi yathāvuttacarimālopatopi saṃvibhajitvāva ekadesaṃ datvāva bhuñjeyyuṃ, yathāhaṃ dānasaṃvibhāgassa vipākaṃ paccakkhato jānāmi, evaṃ yadi jāneyyunti. Yasmā ca khotiādinā kammaphalassa appaccakkhabhāvato evamete sattā dānasaṃvibhāgesu na pavattantīti yathādhippetamatthaṃ kāraṇena sampaṭipādeti. Eteneva tesaṃ tadaññapuññesu ca appaṭipattiyā apuññesu ca paṭipattiyā kāraṇaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在偈颂中:“如大仙所说”(yathāvuttaṃ mahesinā):即由大仙、世尊所开示的“对畜生道有情布施,可期待百倍的回报”等教导,或者就是在此处经文中说的“如果众生这样了知”等。意思是:以智慧照见了如前所述的那颗心。“分享的异熟”(vipākaṃ saṃvibhāgassa):连分享的果报都如此殊胜,更何况是布施的果报呢?“如同成为大果”(yathā hoti mahapphalanti):意思是就如同那个异熟成为大果报一样,如果这些众生能够这样了知。以这种方式将前后文联结起来理解。“平息悭吝之垢”(vineyya maccheramala):即去除悭吝的污垢之后,以对业果和三宝的深信,内心变得特别清净明澈;对于那些因远离烦恼而被尊为圣者,以及戒行等功德具足的人,即使所布施的物很少,也会产生巨大的果报。这些众生应于适当的时机,向这些应供养者行布施。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu yathāvuttaṃ mahesināti mahesinā bhagavatā ‘‘tiracchānagate dānaṃ datvā sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā’ tiādinā, idheva vā ‘‘evaṃ ce sattā jāneyyu’’ntiādinā yathāvuttaṃ, ñāṇacārena taṃ yathāvuttaṃ cittaṃ ñātanti attho. Vipākaṃ saṃvibhāgassāti saṃvibhāgassapi vipākaṃ, ko pana vādo dānassa. Yathā hoti mahapphalanti yathā so vipāko mahantaṃ phalaṃ hoti, evaṃ ime sattā yadi jāneyyunti sambandho. Vineyya maccheramalanti macchariyamalaṃ apanetvā kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca visesato pasannena cittena yesu kilesehi ārakattā ariyesu sīlādiguṇasampannesu dinnaṃ appakampi dānaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, tesu yuttakālena dajjuṃ dadeyyuṃ.
“由于能成就大果的供养,所以称为‘应受供养者’”(dakkhiṇeyyā):即那些正行道者,在这些应受供养者中。“供养”(dakkhiṇa):即深信他世而应当施与的布施物,就像使那个布施成为大布施一样,这样去行布施。或者,是在布施了众多食物之后。那么,应当如何布施食物呢?经文回答说:“在应受供养者中(施与)供养”。施主们从此“人身”(manussattā)——即从人有的身中死去之后,以结生心投生而往天界。“欲乐者”(kāmakāmino):即对于可意的广大天界诸欲,他们因获得了具足形色与威势的业而能够往生受用,并且因行善积德而被称作欲乐者、一切欲乐圆满具足者。他们“喜悦”(modanti),就是随心所欲地享受快乐。显示巴利原文
Mahapphalabhāvakaraṇato dakkhiṇaṃ arahantīti dakkhiṇeyyā, sammāpaṭipannā, tesu dakkhiṇeyyesu. Dakkhiṇaṃ paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbaṃ deyyadhammaṃ yathā taṃ dānaṃ hoti mahādānaṃ, evaṃ datvā. Atha vā bahuno annaṃ datvā, kathaṃ pana annaṃ dātabbanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇa’’nti. Ito manussattā manussattabhāvato cutā paṭisandhivasena saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā. Kāmakāminoti kāmetabbānaṃ uḷārānaṃ devabhogānaṃ paṭiladdharūpavibhavena kammunā upagamane sādhukāritāya kāmakāmino sabbakāmasamaṅgino. Modanti yathāruci paricārentīti attho.
第七:慈心修习经注释显示巴利原文
7. Mettābhāvanāsuttavaṇṇanā
27 第七经中,“任何有的”(yāni kānicīti):这是毫无遗漏地总摄一切。“依于存依的福德行事处”(opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūnīti):这是对它们的定性。在此处,“存依”指诸蕴,以存依为因的戒行是它们的基石,或者说以存依为宗旨、目标,故称“依于存依的”。即那些能在善趣生命中产生“有身”(自体),并带来结生与转起异熟的业。“福德行事处”:它们既是福德之行,同时也是种种果报与殊胜利益的依处,因此叫做“福德行事处”。若简要概括,即分为三种:布施所成、戒所成、修习所成。其中需细说的内容,将在后面的《三聚注释》中详述。所谓“慈心解脱”(mettāya cetovimuttiyā),即由修习慈心所证得的三禅或四禅等至。因为单提“慈”时,可包含近行定与安止定;当说“心解脱”时,则唯指安止的禅那。由于此禅那极善将心从五盖等敌对法中解脱,故名“心解脱”。“不值十六分之一”(kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasi显示巴利原文
27. Sattame yāni kānicīti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūnīti
这是对它们的厘定。此处,“存依”指诸蕴,以存依为因的戒行是它们的基石,或者说以存依为宗旨、目标,故称“依于存依的”。即那些能在善趣生命中产生“有身”(自体),并带来结生与转起异熟的业。“福德行事处”:它们既是福德之行,同时也是种种果报与殊胜利益的依处,因此叫做“福德行事处”。若简要概括,即分为三种:布施所成、戒所成、修习所成。其中需细说的内容,将在后面的《三聚注释》中详述。所谓“慈心解脱”(mettāya cetovimuttiyā),即由修习慈心所证得的三禅或四禅等至。因为单提“慈”时,可包含近行定与安止定;当说“心解脱”时,则唯指安止的禅那。由于此禅那极善将心从五盖等敌对法中解脱,故名“心解脱”。“不值十六分之一”(kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ):即那些依于存依的福德行事处,其价值不及慈心解脱的十六分之一。这表达的是:将慈心解脱的异熟果报分成十六份,从中取一份再分为十六份,那其中的一份,其他依于存依的福德行事显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ niyamanaṃ. Tattha upadhi vuccanti khandhā, upadhissa karaṇaṃ sīlaṃ etesaṃ, upadhippayojanāni vā opadhikāni. Sampattibhave attabhāvajanakāni paṭisandhipavattivipākadāyakāni. Puññakiriyavatthūnīti puññakiriyā ca tā tesaṃ tesaṃ phalānisaṃsānaṃ vatthūni cāti puññakiriyavatthūni. Tāni pana saṅkhepato dānamayaṃ, sīlamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti tividhāni honti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato tikanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Mettāya cetovimuttiyāti mettābhāvanāvasena paṭiladdhatikacatukkajjhānasamāpattiyā. ‘‘Mettā’’ti hi vutte upacāropi labbhati appanāpi, ‘‘cetovimuttī’’ti pana vutte appanājhānameva labbhati. Tañhi nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammato cittassa suṭṭhu vimuttibhāvena cetovimuttīti vuccati. Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasinti mettābrahmavihārassa soḷasabhāgaṃ opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūni na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mettāya cetovimuttiyā yo vipāko, taṃ soḷasa koṭṭhāse katvā tato ekaṃ puna soḷasa koṭṭhāse katvā tattha yo ekakoṭṭhāso, na taṃ aññāni opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūni agghantīti. Adhiggahetvāti abhibhavitvā. Bhāsateti upakkilesavisuddhiyā dippati. Tapateti tato eva anavasese paṭipakkhadhamme santapati. Virocatīti ubhayasampattiyā virocati. Mettā hi cetovimutti candālokasaṅkhātā vigatūpakkilesā juṇhā viya dippati, ātapo viya andhakāraṃ paccanīkadhamme vidhamantī tapati, osadhitārakā viya vijjotamānā virocati ca.
“Seyyathāpīti”是一个表示譬喻的助词。“Tārakarūpānanti”意为诸星光。“Candiyāti”:月亮的(运行)称为“candī”,即“candiyā”,意为月光、明亮。“Vassānanti”:由于多雨而得名的季节。“Pacchime māseti”:在最后一个月,即迦提月。“Saradasamayeti”:在秋季。因为世间将阿沙荼月和迦提月称为“秋季”。“Viddheti”:意为高耸的,即因云散而变得遥远的。因此说“vigatavalāhake”(云已消散)。“Deveti”:在天空中。“Nabhaṃ abbhussakkamānoti”:从升起之处跨越天空。“Tamagatanti”:黑暗。“Abhivihaccāti”:撞击、摧毁之后。“Osadhitārakāti”:因其光芒盛多而被称为“药星”,或因能给予药草助力而名为“药星”。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpīti opammadassanatthe nipāto. Tārakarūpānanti jotīnaṃ. Candiyāti candassa ayanti candī, tassā candiyā, pabhāya juṇhāyāti attho. Vassānanti vassānaṃ bahuvasena laddhavohārassa utuno. Pacchime māseti kattikamāse. Saradasamayeti saradakāle. Assayujakattikamāsā hi loke ‘‘saradautū’’ti vuccanti. Viddheti ubbiddhe, meghavigamena dūrībhūteti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘vigatavalāhake’’ti. Deveti ākāse. Nabhaṃ abbhussakkamānoti udayaṭṭhānato ākāsaṃ ullaṅghanto. Tamagatanti tamaṃ. Abhivihaccāti abhihantvā vidhamitvā. Osadhitārakāti ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhīnaṃ vā anubalappadāyikattā osadhīti laddhanāmā tārakā.
有人问:“既然其他福德也都具有存依的性质,为什么世尊要将慈与其余存依福德区别开来、特别宣说呢?”答:“由于它是最胜的、无过失的,并且于众生中行持善妙。因为这些住是最殊胜的,是对一切众生的正确行持,即所谓慈禅那。如同梵天以无过失之心安住,成就此住的行者也与梵天等同而住,因此这些住被称为‘梵住’。如此,正是由于最胜、无过失,以及于众生中善行持,所以世尊唯独将慈与其余存依福德区别而说。”显示巴利原文
Etthāha – kasmā pana bhagavatā samānepi opadhikabhāve mettā itarehi opadhikapuññehi visesetvā vuttāti? Vuccate – seṭṭhaṭṭhena niddosabhāvena ca sattesu suppaṭipattibhāvato. Seṭṭhā hi ete vihārā, sabbasattesu sammāpaṭipattibhūtāni yadidaṃ mettājhānāni. Yathā ca brahmāno niddosacittā viharanti, evaṃ etehi samannāgatā yogino brahmasamāva hutvā viharanti. Tathā hime ‘‘brahmavihārā’’ti vuccanti. Iti seṭṭhaṭṭhena niddosabhāvena ca sattesu suppaṭipattibhāvato mettāva itarehi opadhikapuññehi visesetvā vuttā.
即便如此,为何唯独将慈特别区分来说呢?因为慈是其余梵住的基础,也是布施等一切善法的圆满者。此慈确实以对有情行饶益之相生起为其特相,以带来利益为其味,以消除瞋恨为其现起。若以无界限的方式修习、多修习它,那么悲等修习就很容易成就,因此慈是其余梵住的基础。同样,当对有情怀有利益意乐时,对于他们的痛苦便不能忍受,希望他们获得最上成就并长久保持,以及由于无偏袒而对一切处平等运心,这些都很容易成就。而且,这样的大菩萨们,致力于成就一切世间的利益与安乐,他们不通过最上的分别拣择‘应施与此人,不应施与那人’,而将安乐的因——施舍普施于一切有情;为了有情的利益安乐而受持戒律;为圆满戒而修习出离;为对有情利益安乐不迷惑而清净智慧;为增长利益安乐而发起坚固的精进;即使是以最上精进达到英雄状态者,也由于对诸有情怀有利益意乐而宽恕过失;他们所说的‘我们将给你们这些,我们将为你们做这些’等承诺,绝不虚诳;为了有情的利益安乐,他们成为不动摇的基础。对他们以不动摇的慈心先行,纯粹出于利益意乐,即使受到伤害,也保持平等心。”显示巴利原文
Evampi kasmā mettāva evaṃ visesetvā vuttā? Itaresaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato dānādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ paripūrikattā ca. Ayañhi sattesu hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā mettā, hitūpasaṃhārasā, āghātavinayapaccupaṭṭhānā. Yadi anodhiso bhāvitā bahulīkatā, atha sukheneva karuṇādibhāvanā sampajjantīti mettā itaresaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi sattesu hitajjhāsayatāya sati nesaṃ dukkhāsahanatā, sampattivisesānaṃ ciraṭṭhitikāmatā, pakkhapātābhāvena sabbattha samappavattacittatā ca sukheneva ijjhanti. Evañca sakalalokahitasukhavidhānādhimuttā mahābodhisattā ‘‘imassa dātabbaṃ, imassa na dātabba’’nti uttamavicayavasena vibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbasattānaṃ niravasesasukhanidānaṃ dānaṃ denti, hitasukhatthameva nesaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, sīlaparipūraṇatthaṃ nekkhammaṃ bhajanti, tesaṃ hitasukhesu asammohatthāya paññaṃ pariyodapenti, hitasukhābhivaḍḍhanatthameva daḷhaṃ vīriyamārabhanti, uttamavīriyavasena vīrabhāvaṃ pattāpi sattānaṃ nānappakāraṃ hitajjhāsayeneva aparādhaṃ khamanti, ‘‘idaṃ vo dassāma, karissāmā’’tiādinā kataṃ paṭiññātaṃ na visaṃvādenti, tesaṃ hitasukhāyeva acalādhiṭṭhānā honti. Tesu acalāya mettāya pubbakārino hitajjhāsayeneva nesaṃ vippakāre udāsīnā honti, pubbakāritāyapi na paccupakāramāsisantīti. Evaṃ te pāramiyo pūretvā yāva dasabalacatu-vesārajja-chaasādhāraṇañāṇa-aṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammappabhede sabbepi kalyāṇadhamme paripūrenti. Evaṃ dānādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ pāripūrikā mettāti ca imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ sā itarehi visesetvā vuttā.
此外,慈相比于其余有所依的福德,具有更大神力,这应通过《韦拉摩经》来说明。在该经中,依次说:比韦拉摩的大布施,供养一位入流者的布施果报更大;比供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者的布施果报更大……比供养一百位独觉佛,供养世尊的布施果报更大;比此,供养以佛陀为首的僧团的布施果报更大;比此,为四方僧团施舍精舍的果报更大;比此,皈依三宝的果报更大;比此,受持戒律的果报更大;比此,仅仅在挤牛乳的短暂时间里修习慈心,其果报更大。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Apica mettāya itarehi opadhikapuññehi mahānubhāvatā velāmasuttena dīpetabbā. Tattha hi yathā nāma mahatā velāmassa dānato ekassa sotāpannassa dānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ sotāpannasatato ekassa sakadāgāmissa dānaṃ…pe… paccekabuddhasatato bhagavato, tatopi buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dānaṃ, tatopi cātuddisassa saṅghassa vihāradānaṃ, tatopi saraṇagamanaṃ, tatopi sīlasamādānaṃ, tatopi gaddūhanamattaṃ kālaṃ mettābhāvanā mahapphalatarā vuttā. Yathāha –
“居士,韦拉摩婆罗门曾作大布施。若有人供养一位具见者,其果报比那更大。若供养一百位具见者……乃至受持远离酒类等放逸处的学处。若有人即使仅修习挤牛乳许时间的慈心,其果报也比那更大。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ gahapati velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ. Yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalataraṃ. Yo ca sataṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya…pe… surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiṃ. Yo ca antamaso gaddūhanamattampi mettacittaṃ bhāveyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’nti (a. ni. 9.20).
然而,由于它是广大福德,较之小福德自然更为殊胜,这自不待言。正如经中所说:“凡有所量所作之业,它不会留在那里,不会在那里存立。”因为欲界业称为“有所量所作”,而广大业则超越了量,是通过有界限与无界限遍满的方式增长而造作的,所以称为“无量所作”。欲界业不能粘着于广大业之间,也不能制伏该业而取得自身果报的机会而住立;反而是那个广大业,犹如大水淹没小水一般,制伏那小业,取得自己的空间而住立,遮止了小业的果报,自己将(有情)导至梵天世界——这便是其义趣。显示巴利原文
Mahaggatapuññabhāvena panassā parittapuññato sātisayatāya vattabbameva natthi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ, na taṃ tatrāvasissati, na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; saṃ. ni. 4.360). Kāmāvacarakammañhi pamāṇakataṃ nāma, mahaggatakammaṃ pana pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā odhisakānodhisakapharaṇavasena vaḍḍhitvā katattā appamāṇakataṃ nāma. Kāmāvacarakammaṃ tassa mahaggatakammassa antarā laggituṃ vā taṃ kammaṃ abhibhavitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ gahetvā ṭhātuṃ vā na sakkoti, atha kho mahaggatakammameva taṃ parittakammaṃ mahogho viya parittaṃ udakaṃ abhibhavitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā sayameva brahmasahabyataṃ upanetīti ayañhi tassa atthoti.
在偈颂中:“yo”指任何一位在家众或出家众。“mettaṃ”即慈禅那。“appamāṇaṃ”指由修习方面和所缘方面都是无量的。因为它不像不净修习等那样于所缘只取一部分,而是通过无余遍满、无界限遍满而成为无量所缘,由娴熟的修习而成为无量。“tanū saṃyojanā hontī”(诸结变得薄弱)的意思是:以慈禅那为近因修观之后,证得下分圣道的人,随着瞋恚结等被断除,它们变得薄弱。因此说“passato upadhikkhayaṃ”。所谓“upadhikkhayo”即指涅槃。而他通过作证现观的方式,以道智看见它。或者,“tanū saṃyojanā hontī”的意思是:以慈禅那为立足处的观,渐次证得称为灭尽依著的阿拉汉果,对于见此者,不用等到那时,十结便早已薄弱并被断除。或者,“tanū saṃyojanā hontī”意思是瞋恚以及和瞋恚相应的诸结变得薄弱。“passato upadhikkhayaṃ”意思是通过证得那些烦恼、依著的灭尽——也就是慈(或涅槃)——而看见的人。这里应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu yoti yo koci gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā. Mettanti mettājhānaṃ. Appamāṇanti bhāvanāvasena ārammaṇavasena ca appamāṇaṃ. Asubhabhāvanādayo viya hi ārammaṇe ekadesaggahaṇaṃ akatvā anavasesapharaṇavasena anodhisopharaṇavasena ca appamāṇārammaṇatāya paguṇabhāvanāvasena appamāṇaṃ. Tanū saṃyojanā hontīti mettājhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā sammasitvā heṭṭhime ariyamagge adhigacchantassa sukheneva paṭighasaṃyojanādayo pahīyamānā tanū honti. Tenāha ‘‘passato upadhikkhaya’’nti. ‘‘Upadhikkhayo’’ti hi nibbānaṃ vuccati. Tañcassa sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena maggañāṇena passati. Atha vā tanū saṃyojanā hontīti mettājhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya anukkamena upadhikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ patvā taṃ passato pageva dasapi saṃyojanā tanū honti, pahīyantīti attho. Atha vā tanū saṃyojanā hontīti paṭigho ceva paṭighasampayuttasaṃyojanā ca tanukā honti. Passato upadhikkhayanti tesaṃyeva kilesūpadhīnaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ mettaṃ adhigamavasena passanta ssāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
如此开示了慈心修习达到顶端所带来的断烦恼与证涅槃的功德之后,为了显示其余功德,便说‘ekampi ce’等。其中,「aduṭṭhacitto」是指由于慈心的力量,已善加镇伏嗔恨,故未被嗔恨所染污的心。「mettāyatī」是指以遍满利益的方式修慈。「kusalī」是指极善巧、具大福德者,或者通过去除嗔恚等无义而成为善者。「khemī tena」是指由于该慈心修习而成为安稳者。「sabbe ca pāṇe」中的「ca」字表示差别。「manasānukampaṃ」是以心意悲悯。这就是说:即使仅对一位有情修慈,也积聚了大善聚。若以心将一切有情视若爱子,以遍满利益的方式悲悯,那么这位具清净心的圣者便造作、产生了能令自己的果报相续流布六十四大劫的众多、广大、无量、无边的殊胜福德。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kilesappahānaṃ nibbānādhigamañca mettābhāvanāya sikhāppattamānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni aññe ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘ekampi ce’’tiādimāha. Tattha aduṭṭhacittoti mettābalena suṭṭhu vikkhambhitabyāpādatāya byāpādena adūsitacitto. Mettāyatīti hitapharaṇavasena mettaṃ karoti. Kusaloti atisayena kusalavā mahāpuñño, paṭighādianatthavigamena vo. Khemī tenāti tena mettāyitena. Sabbe ca pāṇeti casaddo byatireke. Manasānukampanti cittena anukampanto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ekasattavisayāpi tāva mettā mahākusalarāsi, sabbe pana pāṇe attano piyaputtaṃ viya hitapharaṇena manasā anukampanto pahūtaṃ bahuṃ anappakaṃ apariyantaṃ catusaṭṭhimahākappepi attano vipākappabandhaṃ pavattetuṃ samatthaṃ uḷārapuññaṃ ariyo parisuddhacitto puggalo pakaroti nipphādeti.
「sattasaṇḍaṃ」一词,意思是具足称为“有情稠林”的稠密,即充满有情、不稀薄、人烟稠密的意思。「vijitvā」是指不用杖刑、不用刀剑,唯以正法征服之后。「rājisayo」是指如同仙人般的诸法王。「yajamānā」是指正在行布施时。「anupariyagā」是指遍行各处。显示巴利原文
Sattasaṇḍanti sattasaṅkhātena saṇḍena samannāgataṃ bharitaṃ, sattehi aviraḷaṃ ākiṇṇamanussanti attho. Vijitvāti adaṇḍena asatthena dhammeneva vijinitvā. Rājisayoti isisadisā dhammikarājāno. Yajamānāti dānāni dadamānā. Anupariyagāti vicariṃsu.
在「assamedhaṃ」等词中,据说在古昔国王时代,有四种摄受法,即谷祭、勇士祭、善结、爱语祭,国王们以此摄受世间。其中,「sassamedha」(谷祭)是指从已成熟的谷物中抽取十分之一,意为在谷物成就上有智慧。「purisamedha」(勇士祭)是指给大勇士提供六个月的食粮与薪水,意为在摄受勇士方面有智慧。「sammāpāsa」(善结)是指让贫困者写下借据,借给他们一千、两千等钱财,三年内不加利息。由于它恰当地将人们系结起来,犹如系在心上,故称为“善结”。「vācāpeyya」(爱语祭)是指以“孩儿、伯父”等柔和的言语来摄受,意为说可爱语、爱语。如此以四种摄受法所摄受的国土,会变得富庶、繁荣、饮食丰足、安稳无诤。人们快乐欢喜,内心喜悦,将孩子搂在怀中嬉戏,门户敞开而住。因为家宅大门无闩,所以称为「niraggaḷa」(无闩)。这便是古昔的传承,这便是古昔的常法。显示巴利原文
Assamedhantiādīsu porāṇakarājakāle kira sassamedhaṃ, purisamedhaṃ, sammāpāsaṃ, vācāpeyyanti cattāri saṅgahavatthūni ahesuṃ, yehi rājāno lokaṃ saṅgaṇhiṃsu. Tattha nipphannasassato dasamabhāgaggahaṇaṃ sassamedhaṃ nāma, sassasampādane, medhāvitāti attho. Mahāyodhānaṃ chamāsikaṃ bhattavetanānuppadānaṃ purisamedhaṃ nāma, purisasaṅgaṇhane medhāvitāti attho. Daliddamanussānaṃ potthake lekhaṃ gahetvā tīṇi vassāni vinā vaḍḍhiyā sahassadvisahassamattadhanānuppadānaṃ sammāpāsaṃ nāma. Tañhi sammā manusse pāseti hadaye bandhitvā viya ṭhapeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāpāsa’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Tāta mātulā’’tiādinā pana saṇhavācāya saṅgahaṇaṃ vācāpeyyaṃ nāma, peyyavajjaṃ piyavācatāti attho. Evaṃ catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi saṅgahitaṃ raṭṭhaṃ iddhañceva hoti phītañca pahūtaannapānaṃ khemaṃ nirabbudaṃ. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā viharanti . Idaṃ gharadvāresu aggaḷānaṃ abhāvato ‘‘niraggaḷa’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ porāṇikā paveṇi, ayaṃ porāṇikā pakati.
然而,到了甘蔗王时期,婆罗门将这四摄事及国土的繁荣完全颠倒,连根本都倒转了过来,创立了所谓马祭、人祭等五种大祭祀。正如世尊在《婆罗门法经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Aparabhāge pana okkākarājakāle brāhmaṇā imāni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni imañca raṭṭhasampattiṃ parivattentā uddhammūlaṃ katvā assamedhaṃ purisamedhantiādike pañca yaññe nāma akaṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā brāhmaṇadhammiyasutte –
他们心生颠倒,见微细后,又从微细……(中略)……
他们在那里编集了咒语,然后前往甘蔗王那里。(《经集》301–304)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tesaṃ āsi vipallāso, disvāna aṇuto aṇuṃ…pe…. ‘‘Te tattha mante ganthetvā, okkākaṃ tadupāgamu’’nti. (su. ni. 301-304);
“assaṃ ettha medhaṃ bādhentī”故名“assamedho”。此名即指这样一种祭祀:它以两种辅助祭祀举行,设有二十一祭柱,仅于最后一日便恐怖地屠杀九十七乃至五百头牲畜,除土地与男子外,将一切财物用作布施。
“purisaṃ ettha medhaṃ bādhentī”故名“purisamedho”。此名即指以四种辅助祭祀举行,连同土地在内,布施财物如前马祭所述的那种祭祀。
“sammaṃ ettha pāsanti khipantī”故名“sammāpāso”。此名即指那种名为“satrayāga”的祭祀:投掷一种名为“穿轭孔”的投棒,在其落下之处筑坛,使用可移动的祭柱等,从萨罗沙提河沉没处开始,逆流而上举行。
“vājaṃ ettha pivantī”故名“vājapeyyo”。此名即指以单独一种辅助祭祀、用十七头牲畜举行,有榅桲祭柱,布施十七种物品的祭祀。
“natthi ettha aggaḷo”故名“niraggaḷo”。此名即指以九种辅助祭祀举行,连同土地与男子,财物布施如前马祭所述,名为无闩的祭祀的称呼。显示巴利原文
Tattha assamettha medhanti bādhentīti assamedho. Dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ekasmiṃ pacchimadivase eva sattanavutipañcapasusataghātabhīsanassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhanti bādhentīti purisamedho. Catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃbhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsanti khipantīti sammāpāso. Yugacchiggaḷe pavesanadaṇḍakasaṅkhātaṃ sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatinadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa satrayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ vājamettha pivantīti vājapeyyo. Ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beḷuvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷoti niraggaḷo. Navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
“Candappabhā”意指月光。“Tāragaṇā va sabbe”意为:正如一切星宿群,其光辉不及月亮十六分之一;同样地,这些马祭等祭祀,对于以所述特征善修慈心的人来说,不及十六分之一,无法企及,亦不及其价值——这就是含义。显示巴利原文
Candappabhāti candappabhāya. Tāragaṇāva sabbeti yathā sabbepi tārāgaṇā candimasobhāya soḷasimpi kalaṃ nāgghanti, evaṃ te assamedhādayo yaññā mettacittassa vuttalakkhaṇena subhāvitassa soḷasimpi kalaṃ nānubhavanti, na pāpuṇanti, nāgghantīti attho.
现在,为了显示慈心修习的现世与来世利益,而说了“yo na hantī”等。其中,yo:指致力于修习慈梵住的补特伽罗。na hantī:由于那慈心修习的威力,嗔恨已被远远镇伏,故不伤害任何众生,不以土块、棍棒等去恼害。na ghātetī:不教唆他人杀害众生,也不教唆他人恼害。na jinātī:不以忿怒争论等方式征服任何人,因为忿怒本身就不存在;或者,不以赌博、诉讼等方式让人蒙受财产损失。na jāpayeti:也不使令他人去造成别人的财产损失。mettaṃso:慈心所成的那部分,或由于不舍弃而成为其组成部分,故为慈心分。sabbabhūtesu:于一切众生。tato eva veraṃ tassa na kenacī:因此,不善之怨敌,不因任何原因而存在于他;称为人怨的对立,对于这位住于慈者来说,不与任何人存在。显示巴利原文
Idāni aparepi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyike mettābhāvanāya ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘yo na hantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yoti mettābrahmavihārabhāvanānuyutto puggalo. Na hantīti teneva mettābhāvanānubhāvena dūravikkhambhitabyāpādatāya na kañci sattaṃ hiṃsati, leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi na vibādhati vā. Na ghātetīti paraṃ samādapetvā na satte hanāpeti na vibādhāpeti ca. Na jinātīti sārambhaviggāhikakathādivasena na kañci jināti sārambhasseva abhāvato, jānikaraṇavasena vā aḍḍakaraṇādinā na kañci jināti. Na jāpayeti parepi payojetvā paresaṃ dhanajāniṃ na kārāpeyya. Mettaṃsoti mettāmayacittakoṭṭhāso, mettāya vā aṃso avijahanaṭṭhena avayavabhūtoti mettaṃso. Sabbabhūtesūti sabbasattesu. Tato eva veraṃ tassa na kenacīti akusalaveraṃ tassa kenacipi kāraṇena natthi, puggalaverasaṅkhāto virodho kenaci purisena saddhiṃ tassa mettāvihārissa natthīti.
如此,在《一集》中,依序于十三经及两部学经,共十五经中,阐明了还灭;在《盖经》《结经》《不放逸经》《骨聚经》这四经中,阐明了流转与还灭;其余诸经则只阐明了流转。显示巴利原文
Evametasmiṃ ekakanipāte paṭipāṭiyā terasasu suttesu sikkhāsuttadvaye cāti pannarasasu suttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, nīvaraṇasuttaṃ saṃyojanasuttaṃ appamādasuttaṃ aṭṭhisañcayasuttanti etesu catūsu suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Itaresu pana vaṭṭameva kathitanti.